May 12, 2024  
Official Course Syllabi 2017-2018 
    
Official Course Syllabi 2017-2018 [ARCHIVED CATALOG]

Course Syllabi


 

Accounting

  
  • ACCT 1050 - Financial Record Keeping


    Credits: 4.00
    (4 contact hrs)
    This course is not recommended for accounting majors or transfer students. This course will provide a procedural and practical approach to maintaining accounting records. The accounting cycle for a service company and a merchandising concern will be covered. Topics will include journals, ledgers, trial balances, financial statements, subsidiary ledgers, and payroll records. Manual and computerized accounting are used.

    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to utilize the rules and concepts authorized by generally accepted accounting principles.

    Objectives: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to:

    1. Identify these rules and concepts.
    2. Identify when and where various rules and concepts are used.
    3. Demonstrate the use of rules and concepts in various record-recording situations.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to distinguish the various aspects of journalizing in accounting records.

    Objectives: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to:

    1. Explain the process of journalizing.
    2. Distinguish between debits and credits and their effect on increases and decreases.
    3. Demonstrate the preparation and recording of journal entries.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to relate the various methods used to estimate values and expenses.

    Objectives: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to:

    1. Calculate cost of sales and ending inventory.
    2. Calculate depreciation expense.
    3. Prepare adjusting journal entries associated with closing accounting records.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to prepare required financial statements and analyze business results.

    Objectives: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to:

    1. Identify the three primary financial statements and what purpose each serves in presenting the business finances.
    2. Demonstrate the ability to prepare each financial statement.

    Outcome 5: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to use a computer program system to record and accumulate financial data in the business world

    Objectives: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to:

    1. Explain the role of computer programs in a financial record-keeping system.
    2. Demonstrate the ability to use a computer software system to record and maintain a set of financial records.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Accounting Concepts and Procedures
      1. Explain accounting and the accounting equation
      2. Record transactions into the equation
      3. Prepare 3 financial statements
    2. Debits and Credits: Analyzing and Recording Business
      1. Transactions
      2. Explain T accounts and use to record transactions
      3. Prepare a trial balance and financial statements
    3. Beginning the Accounting Cycle
      1. Analyze and record transactions in a journal
      2. Post to a ledger
      3. Take a trial balance
    4. Accounting Cycle Continued
      1. Explain adjustments
      2. Record them on a worksheet
      3. Prepare financial statements
    5. Accounting Cycle Completed
      1. Journalize and post adjusting entries
      2. Journalize and post closing entries
      3. Take a post-closing trial balance
    6. Banking Procedures and Control of Cash
      1. Explain banking procedures and checking accounts
      2. Explain bank reconciliation
      3. Explain petty cash and chance funds
    7. The Payroll Process
      1. Calculate gross and net pay
      2. Prepare a payroll register and employee earnings record
      3. Calculate employer taxes
      4. Make journal entries
      5. Prepare Quarterly and Annual Reports
    8. Sales and Cash Receipts
      1. Make journal entries
      2. Post to general and subsidiary ledgers
      3. Prepare a schedule of accounts receivable
    9. Purchases and Cash Payments
      1. Make journal entries
      2. Post to general and subsidiary ledgers
      3. Prepare a schedule of accounts payable
    10. Accounting Cycle for a Merchandise Company
      1. Prepare adjusting entries
      2. Prepare financial statements

    Primary Faculty
    Jex, Fred
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Evans-Mach, Patrick



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ACCT 1070 - Accounting for Entrepreneurs


    Credits: 3.00
    (3 contact hrs)
    This course will focus on reading and understanding financial statements. Students will learn how to analyze financial statements and how financial information can be effectively used to properly plan, control operations, and to make the right business decisions.

    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to analyze financial accounting information that appears on an income statement and balance sheet.

    Objectives: Given a set of exam questions, the student will be able to:

    1. Describe the purpose and content of each financial statement.
    2. Analyze business transactions.
    3. Account for major transactions involving assets.
    4. Account for major transactions involving liabilities.
    5. Account for major transactions involving equity.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to summarize management accounting information used to make business decisions.

    Objectives: Given a set of exam questions, the student will be able to:

    1. Compute ratio analysis of statements.
    2. Describe the three primary types of business activities and cash flows.
    3. Define different types of costs used in managerial accounting.
    4. Compute cost-volume-profit analysis.
    5. Explain the importance of the budget process

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    The Role of Accounting in Business

    1. Describe the types and forms of businesses, how businesses make money, and business stakeholders.
    2. Describe the three business activities of financing, investing, and operating.
    3. Define accounting and describe its roll in business.
    4. Describe and illustrate the basic financial statements and how they interrelate.
    5. Describe eight accounting concepts underlying financial reporting.

    Basic Accounting Concepts

    1. Describe the basic elements of a financial accounting system.
    2. Analyze, record, and summarize transactions for a corporation’s first period of operations.
    3. Prepare financial statements for a corporation’s first period of operations.

    Accrual Accounting Concepts

    1. Describe basic accrual accounting concepts, including the matching concept.
    2. Use accrual concepts of accounting to analyze, record, and summarize transactions.
    3. Describe and illustrate the end-of-period adjustments process.
    4. Prepare financial statements using accrual concepts of accounting, including a classified balance sheet.
    5. Describe how the accrual basis of accounting enhances the interpretation of financial statements.

    Accounting for Merchandising Businesses

    1. Distinguish the activities and financial statements of a service business from those of a merchandising business.
    2. Describe and illustrate the financial statements of a merchandising business.
    3. Describe the accounting for the sale of merchandise.
    4. Describe the accounting for the purchase of merchandise

    Sarbanes-Oxley, Internal Control, and Cash

    1. Describe the Sarbanes-Oxley Act and its impact on internal controls and financial reporting.
    2. Describe and illustrate the objective and elements of internal control.
    3. Describe and illustrate the application of internal controls to cash.
    4. Describe the nature of a bank account and its use in controlling cash.
    5. Describe and illustrate the use of a bank reconciliation in controlling cash.

    Receivables and Inventories

    1. Describe the common classifications of receivables.
    2. Describe the nature of and the accounting for uncollectible receivables.
    3. Describe the direct write-off method of accounting for uncollectible receivables.
    4. Describe three inventory cost flow assumptions and how they impact the financial statements.
    5. Compare and contrast the use of the three inventory costing methods.
    6. Describe how receivables and inventory are reported on the financial statements.

    Fixed Assets and Intangible Assets

    1. Define, classify, and account for the cost of fixed assets.
    2. Compute depreciation using the straight-line and double-declining-balance methods
    3. Describe the accounting for intangible assets.
    4. Describe how depreciation expense is reported on an income statement and prepare a balance sheet that includes fixed assets and intangible assets.

    Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity

    1. Describe how businesses finance their operations.
    2. Describe and illustrate current liabilities, notes payable, taxes, contingencies, and payroll.
    3. Describe and illustrate the financing of operations through issuance of stock.
    4. Describe and illustrate the accounting for cash and stock dividends.
    5. Describe financial statement reporting of liabilities and stockholders’ equity.
    6. Analyze the impact of debt or equity financing on earnings per share.

    Financial Statement Analysis

    1. Describe basic financial statement analytical methods.
    2. Use financial statement analysis to assess the liquidity and solvency of a business.
    3. Use financial statement analysis to assess the profitability of a business.
    4. Describe the contents of corporate annual reports.

    Accounting Systems for Manufacturing Businesses

    1. Describe the differences between financial and managerial accounting.
    2. Distinguish the activities of a manufacturing business from those of a merchandising or service business.
    3. Define and illustrate materials, factory labor, and factory overhead costs.
    4. Describe cost accountings systems used by manufacturing businesses.
    5. Describe and illustrate a job order cost accounting system.
    6. Use job order cost information for decision making.
    7. Describe the flow of costs for a service business that uses a job order cost accounting system.

    Cost Behavior and Cost-Volume-Profit Analysis

    1. Classify costs as variable costs, fixed costs, or mixed costs.
    2. Compute the contribution margin, the contribution margin ratio, and the unit contribution margin.
    3. Determine the break-even point and sales necessary to achieve a target profit.

    Differential Analysis and Product Pricing

    1. Prepare differential analysis reports for a variety of managerial decisions.
    2. Determine the selling price of a product, using the total cost, product cost, and variable cost concepts.

    Budgeting and Standard Cost Systems

    1. Describe budgeting, its objectives, its impact on human behavior, and types of budget systems.
    2. Describe the master budget for a manufacturing company.
    3. Describe the types of standards and how they are established.

    Primary Faculty
    Glass, Shirley
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Evans-Mach, Patrick



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ACCT 1080 - Principles of Accounting 1


    Credits: 4.00
    (4 contact hrs)
    Introduction to accounting techniques and theories as they relate to business organizations. Transaction analysis and information processing for a service and merchandising concern. Measurement and reporting of assets, liabilities, and equity. The emphasis is on financial accounting.

    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to identify accounting theory at an introductory level.

    Objectives:

    1. Define owner’s equity for a sole proprietorship.
    2. Identify the effect of an accrual adjustment on the financial statement.
    3. Identify an effect of the closing process in the accounting cycle.
    4. Identify a liability account and how it is shown on the balance sheet.
    5. Identify characteristics of a corporation.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to apply accounting techniques at an introductory level.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify accounts having a normal debit/or credit balance.
    2. Make journal entries using the perpetual inventory system.
    3. Compute ending inventory using Fifo, Lifo, WA
    4. Compute the adjusted book balance regarding a bank reconciliation.
    5. Compute depreciation expense using straight-line method of depreciation.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    Accounting and the Business Environment

    1. Explain why accounting is important and list the users of accounting information
    2. Describe the organizations and rules that govern accounting
    3. Describe the accounting equation and define assets, liabilities, and equity
    4. Use the accounting equation to analyze transactions
    5. Prepare financial statements
    6. Use financial statements and return on assets (ROA) to evaluate business performance

    Recording Business Transactions

    1. Explain accounts as they relate to the accounting equation and describe common accounts
    2. Define debits, credits, and normal balances using double-entry accounting and T-accounts
    3. Record transactions in a journal and post journal entries to the ledger
    4. Prepare the trial balance and illustrate how to use the trial balance to prepare financial statements
    5. Use the debt ratio to evaluate business performance

    The Adjusting Process

    1. Differentiate between cash basis accounting and accrual basis accounting
    2. Define and apply the time period concept, revenue recognition, and matching principles
    3. Explain the purpose of and journalize and post adjusting entries
    4. Explain the purpose of and prepare an adjusted trial balance
    5. Identify the impact of adjusting entries on the financial statements

    Completing the Accounting Cycle

    1. Prepare the financial statements including the classified balance sheet
    2. Explain the purpose of, journalize, and post closing entries
    3. Prepare the post-closing trial balance
    4. Describe the accounting cycle
    5. Use the current ratio to evaluate business performance

    Merchandising Operations

    1. Describe merchandising operations and the two types of inventory systems
    2. Account for the purchase of merchandise inventory using a perpetual inventory system
    3. Account for the sale of merchandise inventory using a perpetual inventory system
    4. Adjust and close the accounts of a merchandising business
    5. Prepare a merchandiser’s financial statements
    6. Use the gross profit percentage to evaluate business performance

    Merchandise Inventory

    1. Identify accounting principles and controls related to merchandise inventory
    2. Account for merchandise inventory costs under a perpetual inventory system
    3. Compare the effects on the financial statements when using the different inventory costing methods
    4. Apply the lower-of-cost-or-market rule to merchandise inventory
    5. Measure the effects of merchandise inventory errors on the financial statements
    6. Use inventory turnover and days’ sales in inventory to evaluate business performance

    Internal Control & Cash

    1. Define internal control and describe the components of internal control and control procedures
    2. Apply internal controls to cash receipts
    3. Apply internal controls to cash payments
    4. Explain and journalize petty cash transactions
    5. Demonstrate the use of a bank account as a control device and prepare a bank reconciliation and related journal entries
    6. Use the cash ratio to evaluate business performance

    Receivables

    1. Define and explain common types of receivables and journalize sales on credit, credit card sales, and debit card sales
    2. Apply the direct write-off method for uncollectibles
    3. Apply the allowance method for uncollectibles and estimate bad debts expense based on the percent-of-sales, percent-of-receivables, and aging-of-receivables methods
    4. Account for notes receivable including computing interest and recording honored and dishonored notes
    5. Use the acid-test ratio, accounts receivable turnover ratio, and days’ sales in receivables to evaluate business performance

    Plant Assets, Natural Resources, & Intangibles

    1. Measure the cost of a plant asset.
    2. Account for depreciation using the straight-line, units-of-production, and double-declining-balance methods
    3. Journalize entries of the disposal of plant assets
    4. Account for natural resources
    5. Account for intangible assets
    6. Use the asset turnover ratio to evaluate performance

    Current Liabilities & Payroll

    1. Account for current liabilities of known amount
    2. Calculate and journalize basic payroll transactions
    3. Account for current liabilities that must be estimated
    4. Account for contingent liabilities
    5. Use the times-interest-earned ratio to evaluate business performance

    Long-Term Liabilities

    1. Journalize transactions for long-term notes payable and mortgages payable
    2. Describe bonds payable
    3. Journalize transactions for bonds payable and interest expense using the straight-line amortization method
    4. Journalize transactions to retire bonds payable
    5. Report liabilities on the balance sheet
    6. Use the debt to equity ratio to evaluate business performance

    Corporation

    1. Identify the characteristics of a corporation
    2. Journalize the issuance of stock
    3. Account for the purchase and sale of treasury stock
    4. Account for cash dividends, stock dividends, and stock splits
    5. Explain how net income and equity are reported for a corporation
    6. Use earnings per share, rate of return on common stock, and the price/earnings, ratio to evaluate business performance

    Primary Faculty
    Glass, Shirley
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Evans-Mach, Patrick



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ACCT 1090 - Principles of Accounting 2


    Credits: 4.00
    (4 contact hrs)
    Continuation of financial accounting and introduction to managerial accounting. Topics include statement of cash flow, statement analysis, accounting for a manufacturing concern, cost-volume-profit relationships, and budgeting.

    Pre & Co Requisite(s): Prerequisite: ACCT-1080
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to identify accounting theory at an introductory level.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify how depreciation expense would be used in a cash flow statement under the indirect method.
    2. Identify the relevant information for a special business decision.
    3. Identify how changes in volume affect costs.
    4. Distinguish financial accounting from management accounting.
    5. Distinguish among operating, investing, and financing cash flows.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to apply accounting techniques at an introductory level.

    Objectives:

    1. Using financial ratios, compute the acid-test ratio for a given year.
    2. Compute the ending balance in the work in process inventory account.
    3. Compute the number of units that must be sold to earn a targeted operating income.
    4. Compute the budgeted cash collections from customers for a given month
    5. Compute the accounting rate of return on an investment.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    The Statement of Cash Flow

    1. Identify the purposes of the Statement.
    2. Distinguish among operating, investing, and financing flows.
    3. Prepare the statement by the direct method. (Appendix 1A)
    4. Prepare the statement by the indirect method.

    Financial Statement Analysis

    1. Explain how financial statements are used to analyze a business.
    2. Perform a horizontal analysis of financial statements.
    3. Perform a vertical analysis of financial statements.
    4. Compute and evaluate the standard financial ratios.
    5. Complete a corporate income statement including earnings per share (Appendix 2A).

    Introduction to Managerial Accounting

    1. Define managerial accounting and understand how it is used.
    2. Classify costs for service, merchandising, and manufacturing companies.
    3. Prepare an income statement and schedule of goods manufactured for a manufacturing company and calculate cost per item.
    4. Calculate cost per service for a service company and cost per item for a merchandising company.

    Job Order Costing

    1. Distinguish between job order costing and process costing.
    2. Record materials and labor costs in a job order costing system.
    3. Calculate the predetermined overhead allocation rate and allocate overhead costs.
    4. Record the completion and sales of finished goods.
    5. Adjust for over allocated and under allocated overhead.
    6. Calculate job costs for a service company.

    Process Costing

    1. Calculate equivalent units of production for direct materials and conversion costs.
    2. Prepare a production cost report using the weighted-average method.
    3. Prepare journal entries for a process costing system.
    4. Use a production cost report to make decisions.

    Cost-Volume-Profit Analysis

    1. Determine how changes in volume affect costs.
    2. Calculate operating income using contribution margin and contribution margin ratio.
    3. Use cost-volume-profit (CVP) analysis for profit planning.
    4. Use CVP analysis to perform sensitivity analysis.
    5. Use CVP analysis to calculate margin of safety, operating leverage, and multiproduct breakeven points.

    Master Budgets

    1. Describe budgeting objectives, benefits, and procedures and how human behavior influences budgeting.
    2. Define budget types and the components of the master budget.
    3. Prepare an operating budget for a manufacturing company.
    4. Prepare a financial budget for a manufacturing company.

    Flexible Budgets and Standard Costs Systems

    1. Prepare flexible budgets and performance reports using static and flexible budgets.
    2. Identify the benefits of a standard cost system and understand how standards are set.
    3. Compute the standard cost variances for direct materials and direct labor.
    4. Compute the standard cost variances for manufacturing overhead.
    5. Describe the relationship among and responsibility for the product cost variances.
    6. Record transactions in a standard cost system and prepare a standard cost income statement.

    Cost Allocation and Responsibility Accounting

    1. Assign direct costs and allocate indirect costs using predetermined overhead allocation rates with single and multiple allocation bases.
    2. Explain why companies decentralize and use responsibility accounting.
    3. Describe the purpose of performance evaluation systems and how the balanced scorecard helps companies evaluate performance.
    4. Use responsibility reports to evaluate cost, revenue, and profit centers.
    5. Use return on investment (ROI) and residual income (RI) to evaluate investment centers.

    Short-Term Business Decisions

    1. Identify information that is relevant for making short-term decisions.
    2. Make regular and special pricing decisions.
    3. Make decisions about dropping a product, product mix, and sales mix.
    4. Make outsourcing and processing further decisions.

    Chapter 11. Capital Investment Decisions

    1. Describe the importance of capital investments and the capital budgeting process.
    2. Use the payback and the accounting rate of return methods to make capital investment decisions.
    3. Use the time value of money to compute the present values of lump sums and annuities.
    4. Use discounted cash flow methods to make capital investment decisions

    Primary Faculty
    Glass, Shirley
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Evans-Mach, Patrick



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ACCT 1150 - Microcomputer Applications in Accounting


    Credits: 3.00
    (3 contact hrs)
    The student uses a microcomputer to complete accounting tasks and to solve various accounting problems. These accounting systems are studied: general ledger, accounts receivable, accounts payable, depreciation and payroll. In addition, a number of spreadsheet applications are covered.

    Pre & Co Requisite(s): Prerequisite: ACCT-1090
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to use the Excel spreadsheet program to prepare reports, manipulate data, perform financial and statistical calculations, and other common tasks that accountants often must do on a day-to-day basis.

    Objectives:  1. Use basic Microsoft Excel functions

    1. Create a worksheet
    2. Create formulas and functions
    3. Create charts
    4. Manipulate a worksheet

    Objectives: 2. Perform accounting applications using Microsoft Excel

    1. Prepare an Income Statement and Balance Sheet
    2. Prepare a Bank Reconciliation
    3. Prepare a Depreciation Schedule
    4. Compute financial ratios
    5. Prepare a Software Amortization Loan schedule

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to use an accounting program to carry out setting up accounts, recording of transactions, posting to accounts and preparing typical reports with these program modules: Accounts Receivable, Accounts Payable, Payroll and General Ledger.

    Objectives:

    1. Process sales and receivables
    2. Process payables and purchases
    3. Perform general accounting and end-of-period procedures
    4. Process payroll

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Introduction to Microsoft Excel
      1. General Microsoft Excel Navigation
      2. Formulas and Functions
      3. Charts
      4. Database Tools
    2. Accounting Specific Applications using Microsoft Excel
      1. Income Statement and Balance Sheet
      2. Bank Reconciliation
      3. Statement of Cash Flows
      4. Depreciation Schedule
      5. General Financial Ratios
      6. Bond Amortization Schedule
    3. Accounting Software
      1. Introduction to Computers and the Software
      2. Service Business
      3. Sales and Receivables
      4. Payables and Purchases
      5. End-of-Period Procedures
    4. Merchandising Business
      1. Sales and Receivables
      2. Payables and Purchases
      3. End-of-Period Procedures
      4. Payroll
      5. Computerizing a Manual Accounting System

    Primary Faculty
    Jex, Fred
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Evans-Mach, Patrick



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ACCT 2180 - Intermediate Accounting 1


    Credits: 4.00
    (4 contact hrs)
    Review of the accounting process and theory. Coverage in detail of cash and temporary investments, receivables, inventories, long-term investments in stocks, and tangible and intangible assets.

    Pre & Co Requisite(s): Prerequisite: ACCT-1090
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to identify accounting theory at a paraprofessional level.

    Objectives: Given a set of exam questions, the student will be able to:

    1. Identify generally accepted accounting principles.
    2. Identify how items are reported on an Income Statement.
    3. Identify how items are reported on a Balance Sheet.
    4. Explain accounting for receivables.
    5. Describe accounting for Property, Plant & Equipment.
    6. Define accounting for Natural Resources.
    7. Explain accounting for Intangible Assets.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to apply accounting techniques at a paraprofessional level.

    Objectives: Given a set of exam questions, the student will be able to:

    1. Describe how cash items are reported.
    2. Compute a dollar value for inventory.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    The Accounting Information System

    1. Understand basic accounting information system
    2. Identify and perform steps in the accounting cycle
    3. Differentiate the cash basis of accounting from the accrual basis
    4. Understand the difference between adjusting, closing and reversing entries

    Income Statement and Related Information

    1. Understand the uses and limitations of an income statement
    2. Understand the reporting of accounting changes and errors
    3. Explain how to report irregular items
    4. Explain intraperiod tax allocation
    5. Explain how to report other comprehensive income
    6. Prepare an income statement and statement of retained earnings

    Balance Sheet and Statement of Cash Flows

    1. Explain the uses and limitations of a balance sheet
    2. Prepare a balance sheet and statement of cash flows
    3. Identify the purpose and content of the statement of cash flows
    4. Understand the usefulness of the statement of cash flows
    5. Determine which balance sheet information requires supplemental disclosure
    6. Use ratios to analyze financial performance

    Accounting and the Time Value of Money

    1. Identify accounting topics where the time value of money is relevant
    2. Distinguish between simple and compound interest
    3. Understand the difference between present and future value
    4. Understand the difference between an ordinary annuity and an annuity due
    5. Solve future value and present value problems

    Cash and receivables

    1. Identify items considered cash and cash equivalents
    2. Define receivables and identify the different types of receivables
    3. Explain accounting issues related to recognition and valuation of receivables
    4. Explain the fair value option
    5. Describe how to report and analyze receivables
    6. Understand internal controls as it pertains to cash

    Valuation of inventories: a cost basics approach

    1. Understand inventory classifications and different inventory systems
    2. Determine the goods and costs included in inventory
    3. Identify the effects of inventory errors on the financial statements
    4. Describe and compare the cost flow assumptions used to account for inventories
    5. Identify special issues related to LIFO
    6. Understand why companies select given inventory methods

    Inventories: additional valuation issues

    1. Describe and apply the lower-of-cost or net realizable value rule
    2. Explain when companies use the relative sales value method to value inventories
    3. Discuss accounting methods related to purchase commitments
    4. Determine ending inventory by applying the gross profit method
    5. Determine existing inventory by applying the retail inventory method
    6. Explain how to report and analyze inventory

    Acquisition and disposition of property, plant and equipment

    1. Identify the costs to include in initial valuation of property, plant and equipment
    2. Describe the accounting problems with self-constructed assets
    3. Describe the accounting problems with interest capitalization
    4. Understand the accounting issues related to acquiring and valuing plant assets
    5. Describe the accounting treatment for the disposal of property, plant and equipment
    6. Describe the accounting treatment for costs subsequent to acquisition

    Depreciation, impairments and depletion

    1. Understand depreciation concepts and methods of depreciation
    2. Explain special depreciation methods and other depreciation issues
    3. Explain the accounting issues related to asset impairment
    4. Explain the accounting procedures for depletion of natural resources
    5. Explain how to report and analyze property, plant, equipment and natural resources
    6. Understand income tax depreciation

    Intangible Assets

    1. Describe the characteristics, valuation, and amortization of intangible assets
    2. Describe the accounting for various types of intangible assets
    3. Explain the accounting issues recording goodwill
    4. Explain impairment procedures and presentation requirements for intangible assets
    5. Describe accounting and presentation for research and development and similar costs

    Accounting Changes and Error Analysis

    1. Identify types of accounting changes and understand the accounting for changes in accounting principles
    2. Describe the accounting for changes in estimates and changes in reporting entity
    3. Describe the accounting for correction of errors
    4. Analyze the effect of errors

    Statement of Cash Flows

    1. Describe the usefulness and format of the statement of cash flows
    2. Prepare a statement of cash flows (direct and indirect format)
    3. Contrast the direct and indirect methods of calculating net cash flow from operating activities
    4. Discuss special problems in prepare a statement of cash flows

    Primary Faculty
    Newman, Brian
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Evans-Mach, Patrick



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ACCT 2190 - Intermediate Accounting 2


    Credits: 4.00
    (4 contact hrs)
    ACCT-2190 is strongly recommended for students who plan on transferring to a senior college which accepts ACCT-2190. Analysis of current, contingent, and long-term liabilities including bonds, pensions, and leases. Extensive coverage of corporations and stockholders equity including capital at and after formation, retained earnings and appropriations, cash flow statements, and analysis of statements.

    Pre & Co Requisite(s): Prerequisite: ACCT-2180
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to apply accounting techniques at a paraprofessional level.

    Objectives:

    1. Account for current & long-term liabilities
    2. Compute EPS for a simple & complex capital structure
    3. Account for long-term stock & bond investments
    4. Account for reporting requirements for pension plans
    5. Prepare a Statement of Cash Flow using the direct & indirect methods

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to identify accounting theory at a paraprofessional level.

    Objectives:

    1. Account for stockholder equity
    2. Define full disclosure & revenue recognition principles
    3. Account for income tax according to FASB
    4. Account for capital leases by the lessee & lessor
    5. Account for changes in principles, estimates, & error correction

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    Current Liabilities and Contingencies

    1. Describe the nature, valuation and reporting of current liabilities
    2. Explain the classification issues of short-term debt expected to be refinanced
    3. Explain the accounting for gain and loss contingencies
    4. Indicate how to present and analyze liabilities and contingencies

    Long-term Liabilities

    1. Describe the nature of bonds and indicate the accounting for bond issuances
    2. Describe the accounting for extinguishment of debt
    3. Explain the accounting for long-term notes payable
    4. Describe the accounting for the fair value option
    5. Indicate how to present and analyze long-term debt

    Stockholders’ Equity

    1. Describe the corporate form and the issuance of shares of stock
    2. Describe the accounting and reporting for reacquisition of shares
    3. Understand the accounting and reporting issues related to dividends
    4. Indicate how to present and analyze stockholders’ equity

    Dilutive Securities and Earnings per Share

    1. Describe the accounting for the issuance, conversion and retirement of convertible securities
    2. Contrast the accounting for stock warrants and for stock warrants issued with other securities
    3. Describe the accounting and reporting for stock compensation plans
    4. Compute basic EPS and diluted EPS

    Investments

    1. Understand the accounting for investments in debt securities
    2. Understand the accounting for investments in equity securities
    3. Explain the equity and consolidation methods of accounting
    4. Evaluate other major issues related to investments in debt and equity securities

    Revenue Recognition

    1. Understand the fundamental concepts related to revenue recognition
    2. Understand and apply the five-step revenue recognition process
    3. Apply the five-step process to major revenue recognition issues
    4. Describe presentation and disclosure regarding revenue

    Accounting for Income Taxes

    1. Understand the fundamentals of accounting for income taxes
    2. Identify additional issues in accounting for income taxes
    3. Explain the accounting for loss carrybacks and loss carryforwards
    4. Describe the presentation of deferred income taxes in financial statements

    Accounting for Pensions and Postretirement Benefits

    1. Understand the fundamentals of pension plan accounting
    2. Use a worksheet for employer’s pension plan entries
    3. Describe the accounting and amortization of prior service costs
    4. Explain the accounting and amortization for unexpected gains and losses
    5. Describe the requirements for reporting pension plans in financial statements

    Accounting for Leases

    1. Explain the nature, economic substance, and advantages of lease transactions
    2. Describe the accounting for leases by lessees
    3. Describe the accounting for leases by lessors
    4. Describe the accounting and reporting for special features of lease arrangements

    Primary Faculty
    Newman, Brian
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Evans-Mach, Patrick



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ACCT 2270 - Managerial Accounting


    Credits: 4.00
    (4 contact hrs)
    Accumulation of information useful to management in a variety of decision-making situations. Emphasizes manufacturing accounting, cost-volume relations, relevant costs, budgeting, and standard cost system, and quantitative techniques in managerial accounting.

    Pre & Co Requisite(s): Prerequisite: ACCT-1090
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to apply managerial accounting techniques at a paraprofessional level.

    Objectives: Given a set of exam questions, the student will be able to:

    1. Describe the role of management accountants in an organization.
    2. Compute a predetermined overhead rate and use the rate to assign overhead to work in process.
    3. Compute the present value of future cash flows.
    4. Prepare an operating budget.
    5. Compute the materials price and usage variances and explain how they are used for control.
    6. Compute the labor rate and efficiency variances and explain how they are used for control.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to identify accounting theory at a paraprofessional level.

    Objectives: Given a set of exam questions, the student will be able to:

    1. Explain the difference between variable and fixed cost behavior.
    2. Compute the cost per equivalent unit.
    3. Explain why activity-based costing produces more accurate product costs.
    4. Define and explain the concepts of step-variable and step-fixed costs.
    5. Compute the break-even point and targeted profit levels for a multiple-product setting.
    6. Explain the differences between variable costing and absorption costing.
    7. Distinguish between relevant and irrelevant costs.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. The Role, History, and Direction of Management Accounting
    2. Cost Concepts and Terminology
    3. Job-Order Costing
    4. Process Costing
    5. Product Costing and Cost Management: The Advanced Manufacturing Environment
    6. Special Pricing Decisions and Cost Behavior
    7. Cost-Volume-Profit Analysis
    8. Variable Costing
    9. Relevant Costs for Special Decisions
    10. Capital Budgeting: Long-Run Investment Decisions
    11. Budgeting for Planning and Control
    12. Standard Costing: A Managerial Control Tool

    Primary Faculty
    Callaghan, William
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Evans-Mach, Patrick



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ACCT 2300 - Federal Income Tax - Individual


    Credits: 4.00
    (4 contact hrs)
    Orientation to current federal tax laws and techniques in filing annual U.S. individual income tax returns. Provides practical experience in preparation of annual returns and a basic foundation for further study in the tax field.

    Pre & Co Requisite(s): Prerequisite: ACCT-1080 or 2 years work experience in accounting
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be familiar with federal income tax law and theory as it applies to most individual filers.

    Objectives:

    1. Explain the principles used to determine who is taxed on a particular item of income, under both the cash and accrual methods of reporting.
    2. Apply IRS rules to determine whether items such as compensation, dividends, Social Security and pensions and annuities are taxable.
    3. Discuss the criteria for determining whether an activity is a hobby or a trade or business, and determine the tax consequences of vacation homes.
    4. Compute the phase-outs of the itemized deduction, the personal exemption, and the child tax credit.
    5. Discuss the tax treatment and requirements for various deferred compensation arrangement, including IRAs and 401(k)s.

    Outcome 2:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to prepare a fairly complex tax return including Form 1040 and Schedules A, B, C, D, E, SE and 2106.

    Objectives:

    1. Determine the amount and correct number of personal and dependency exemptions.
    2. Determine the correct filing status of individuals, and the amount allowable for the standard deduction.
    3. Determine whether specific exclusions are available, including employment-related fringe benefit items.
    4. Distinguish between deductions for and from AGI, and discuss the criteria for deducting business and investment expenses.
    5. List substantiation requirements for deducting travel and entertainment expenses, and know how to show them.
    6. Identify and determine the timing of itemized deductions for individuals, including medical, taxes, interest, charitable, and miscellaneous.
    7. Identify deductible moving, education, and office in the home expenses.

    Outcome 3:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to prepare a Michigan tax return based on the same data, with similar competence.

    Objectives:

    1. Be able to prepare a Michigan 1040, and related schedules, such as CR, Tuition Credit, and Homestead Credit.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1.  
      1. Chapter 1 Introduction to Taxation
      2. Chapter 2 Determination of Tax
      3. Chapter 3 Gross Income: Concepts & Inclusions
    2.   
      1. C hapter 4 Gross Income: Exclusions
      2. Chapter 15 Tax Research, Tax research problem assigned
      3. Chapter 5 Property Transactions: Capital Gain & Loss
      4. Chapter 6 Deduction & Losses
    3.  
      1. Chapter 7 Itemized Deductions
      2. Chapter 8 Losses & Bad Debts
      3. Chapter 9 Employee Expenses & Deferred Compensation
    4.  
      1. Chapter 10 Depreciation & Cost Recovery
      2. Chapter 11 Accounting Periods & Methods
      3. Chapter 12 Property Transactions: Nontaxable Exchanges
      4. Chapter 13 Property Transactions: Section 1231 and Re- capture
      5. Chapter 14 Special Tax Computation Methods, Tax Credits and Payment of Tax

    Primary Faculty
    Callaghan, William
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Evans-Mach, Patrick



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088


Anthropology

  
  • ANTH 1000 - Introduction to Anthropology


    Credits: 4.00
    (4 contact hrs)
    An introduction to man’s biological evolution and cultural origins. Prehistoric man, biological/genetic differences, and the growth of language and culture will be considered. A cross-cultural study of social institutions, beliefs, and values will be included as well as a discussion of contemporary anthropological problems.

    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to define the science of anthropology.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Identify the four primary subfields of anthropology and recognize essential methodology for each.
    2. Discuss the concept of culture and be able to identify and interpret varied global cultural behaviors.
    3. Recognize and utilize anthropological vocabulary to explain cultural behavior. This may include kinship terminology, status markers, gender markers, etc.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate basic knowledge of human genetics and describe the processes involved in human biological diversity.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Using Punnet squares or a parallel methodology, determine the possibility of various genetic outcomes for individuals.
    2. Illustrate the biological makeup of genetic material within a human cell.
    3. Describe and discuss the various methods by which genetic changes can affect whole populations.
    4. Identify the social concerns arising from contemporary advances in genetic science.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to interpret the theory of human evolution within the context of current archaeological material.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Describe historical world views of the position of humankind within a natural environment.
    2. Explain the theory of evolution and natural selection.
    3. Identify and discuss the paleontological evidence for human evolution and the ancestry of humankind.
    4. Compare and contrast human behavior with that of the living primates.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to employ knowledge of cultural relativism to explain cultural diversity among peoples.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Identify and discuss cultural and logistical aspects of several contemporary non-Western cultures.
    2. Discuss contemporary issues for these cultures - the effects of globalization, contact with other cultures, and political and social homogenization.
    3. Discuss and interpret cultural behaviors which may conflict with their own cultural moral code.

    Outcome 5: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate an ability to examine contemporary issues from an anthropological perspective.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Interpret data and formulate an informed opinion through research and report production on contemporary cultural issues such as marriage practices, child rearing, euthanasia, drug use, etc.
    2. Compare and contrast opposing theories of the validity of evolutionary science.
    3. Discuss and analyze controversial issues arising from scientific and social changes in society.

    Outcome 6: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate critical thinking skills as applied to anthropology.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Compare and contrast current cultural practices, both western and non-western, with each other and with past cultures.
    2. Analyze inter-cultural behaviors such as, for example, artifact typologies, religious practices, marriage customs, burial practices, etc. to gain a more complete picture of the people and their belief systems.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. The Nature of Anthropology
      1. Development of anthropology
      2. The uniqueness of anthropology
      3. Uses of anthropology as applied science.
      4. The “four fields”
      5. Methods of studying the human past; Ethnography
    2. Human Evolution
      1. Evolutionary theory
      2. Evolutionary mechanisms; Human variation
      3. Primate evolution
    3. Evolution of Homo and the Development of Culture
      1. The earliest hominids
      2. Early Homo and cultural origins
      3. Homo erectus and hunting-gathering
      4. Archaic Homo sapiens and the Middle Paleolithic
      5. Homo sapiens and the Later Paleolithic
      6. The Neolithic Revolution
      7. The Urban Revolution and the rise of the State
    4. The Nature of Culture
      1. The cultural concept
      2. Characteristics of culture
      3. Functions of culture
      4. Personality and cultural
      5. Cultural change and survival
    5. Cultural Variation
      1. Marriage and family
      2. Kinship and descent
      3. Gender
      4. Religion and the supernatural; The modern world system

    Primary Faculty
    Meier, Mary
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Narine Mirijanian, Narine



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ANTH 1100 - Introduction to Cultural Anthropology


    Credits: 4.00
    (4 contact hrs)
    This course is an exploration of the world’s many cultures to provide an understanding of the diversity in this ever-shrinking globalized world. The diversity will be illustrated through an examination of social organizations, religion, language, gender roles, the arts, and other elements of culture. In addition, anthropological theories and techniques will be studied to understand cultural evolution, adaptation, and globalization.

    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to recognize the variations among societies and their cultural behaviors.

    Objectives:

    1. Acquire and institutionalize knowledge of non-Western, as well as Western cultures.
    2. Identify, in a culturally relative way, behaviors that disagree with common Western/American means.
    3. Understand that cultural norms differ from society to society.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to synthesize different approaches to the applications of ethnography, ethnology, and other anthropological techniques.

    Objectives:

    1. Read ethnographies written by anthropologists.
    2. Actively engage in a participant observation assignment.
    3. Summarize the alternative methods of study utilized in anthropology.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to interpret ethical issues in dealing with peoples of the past and present.

    Objectives:

    1. Examine the anthropological view of race as a cultural construct.
    2. Describe the process by which biological traits are transferred throughout populations.
    3. Define ethnocentrism and calculate its effect on global behaviors.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to give examples of the diversity in cultural systems.

    Objectives:

    1. Define culture, describing it in its broadest sense.
    2. Illustrate the dynamics of difference in everyday relationships.
    3. Differentiate between alternate forms of kinship, marriage, gender roles, and religions, in addition to other behaviors.

    Outcome 5: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to apply critical thinking techniques to contemporary problems.

    Objectives:

    1. Analyze contemporary national critical issues of warfare, instability, and domination.
    2. Interpret data and formulate an informed opinion through research, and report on an ethnological comparison of cultures.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    Week 1: Orientation: syllabus & course review

    What is cultural anthropology?
    Anthropologist: Franz Boas

    Week 2: What is Culture?

    Anthropologist: E. B. Tylor & Ruth Benedict

    Week 3: How do you study a culture? Ethnography

    Ethical issues
    Anthropologist: Alice Cunningham Fletcher, Robert Harry Lowie, Rosita Worl
    Participant Observation project

    Week 4: Is culture nature or nurture?

    Understanding evolution & brain development
    Anthropologist: Louis & Mary Leakey, Jane Goodall, Diane Fossey

    Week 5: What is language? How do language and culture work together?

    Anthropologist: Alfred Kroeber, Georg Friedrich Grotefend, Edward Sapir, Jean-Francois Champollion

    Week 6: What do you eat and how do you get your food?

    Modes of subsistence
    Anthropologist: Audrey Richards & Marshall Sahlin
    Food and culture project

    Week 7: Does money make the world go around? Examination of gift exchange and valuation of products

    Anthropologist: Bronislaw Malinowski

    Week 8: Midterm

    Week 9: How do we deal with conflict & power?

    Anthropologist: Evans Pritchard, Sally Engle Merry, Laura Nader

    Week 10: Do all cultures view race in the same way?

    What is ethnicity?
    Anthropologist: Hortense Powdermaker, Zora Neale Hurston

    Week 11: Understanding who we are through gender and sex.

    Anthropologist: Margaret Mead, Derek Freeman, Matilda Coxe Stephenson

    Week 12: How are we organized?

    Family and marriage systems
    Anthropologist: Claude Levi-Strauss, Clifford Geertz
    Kinship Chart project

    Week 13: What do we believe?

    Religion & spirituality
    Anthropologist: Roy Rappaport, Michael Harner, Sir James Frazer

    Week 14: What about art in culture?

    How to ‘read’ objects
    Anthropologist: Nancy Munn, John Collier Jr.
    Reading object project

    Week 15: Cultural change, globalization and globalization

    Anthropologist: Eric Wolf, Gregory Bateson, Leith Mullings, Paul Farmer, Michelle Rosaldo

    Week 16: Review & Final Exam


    Primary Faculty
    Meier, Mary
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Wilcox, Dee Ann



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ANTH 1200 - Introduction to Physical Anthropology


    Credits: 4.00
    (4 contact hrs)
    This course is an introduction to the areas of work and techniques employed by physical anthropologists. Topics of interest for this study will be population genetics, the taxonomy of the human, primate similarities and behaviors, fossil evidence, human evolution, human migrations, and current issues . This class will explore the role of humans in the animal world, as well as a member of society.

    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will identify the evolutionary milestones of the history of the human species and the rise of cultural, human-type behaviors.

    Outcome:

    1. Know the fossil evidence available for our hominid ancestors and what behaviors are shown through that evidence.
    2. Understand the development of fossilized remains; how fossilization occurs, what conditions are necessary, what paleoanthropologists discover.
    3. Analyze the inferred behaviors of early hominids and the rise of behaviors classified as human, such as cooking, tool making, hunting, burying the dead, caring for the sick and elderly, the rise of religion, the creation of art.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to identify the biological aspects of genetic diversity among populations of people.

    Outcome:

    1. Identify DNA, from Chromosome to Gene to Allele to Chemical Base Pairs and use the proper terminology to refer to the processes of meiosis and mitosis.
    2. Describe and discuss the methods through which genetic material is transferred from individual to individual.
    3. Describe and discuss the methods through which genetic material is transferred from population to population: Mutation, Natural Selection, Genetic Drift or Gene Flow.

    OUTCOME 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to explain ethical issues arising from modern scientific advances as well as religion based belief systems.

    Outcome:

    1. Discuss why Evolution is a Creation Story and understand the cosmological basis for various ideas of where humankind came from.
    2. Identify social problems arising from the current state of scientific knowledge - - the Human Genome Project conclusions, Stem Cell Ethics, the possible futures of evolution for humans.
    3. Describe and discuss the current issues of primate study and testing. (Jane Goodall, Dian Fossey and other primatologists)
    4. Describe and discuss the social and biological issues facing primates in the wild.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will examine the anthropological belief that homo-sapiens is a member of the animal kingdom.

    Outcome:

    1. Recognize the characteristics of the various taxonomic categories that apply to homo-sapiens.
    2. Identify the animal behaviors and physical characteristics that show similarities and differences from humankind.
    3. Identify primate species and define the concept of common ancestor.
    4. Analyze primate behaviors to attempt to define the separation (if so determined) between animal and human life.

    Outcome 5: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to apply critical thinking skills to anthropological issues through the use of analytic reasoning techniques.

    Outcome:

    1. Analyze and evaluate scientific evidence from fossils, laboratories, and academia through written and verbal reports.
    2. Interpret data and formulate informed opinions through research and report production comparing and contrasting taxonomic categories.
    3. Identify and discuss the changing role of forensic anthropologist in today’s society.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Week One: What is Physical Anthropology? Why do we consider this a science?
    2. Week Two: The Background for Evolution. Darwin and his predecessors.
    3. Week Three: Evolutionary Genetics. How Traits are Inherited.
    4. Week Four: The Processes of Evolution. Population Genetics.
      Mutation, Natural Selection, Gene Flow, Genetic Drift
    5. Week Five: The Origin of Species and Catastrophic Extinctions
    6. Week Six: Geologic Behaviors (Continental Drift). Chronology of Evolution.
    7. Week Seven: The Primates. Physical Aspects
    8. Week Eight: The Primates - Social Aspects
    9. Week Nine: The Evidence for Human Evolution - Fossils, Molecular Clock,
      Creation Stories and Ethics
    10. Week Ten: The Earliest Hominids. Bipedalism.
    11. Week Eleven: The Rise of the Species “Homo”. Homo Habilis, Erectus, Neanderthal, Sapiens.
    12. Week Twelve: Modern Human Adaptations. Population Variation. Disease.
    13. Week Thirteen: Human Biological Diversity - Sex and Gender. Race.
    14. Week Fourteen: Forensic Anthropology / Biological Archaeology
    15. Week Fifteen: Modern Ethical Issues

    Primary Faculty
    Meier, Mary
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Wilcox, Dee Ann



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ANTH 2220 - Introduction to Archaeology


    Credits: 4.00
    (4 contact hrs)
    This course is an introduction to the techniques, methods, and theories that archaeologists use to interpret the human past. The class will also explore archaeological evidence from both the Old and the New Worlds.

    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate knowledge of various ancient societies and their cultural behaviors.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Identify specific cultural materials from various cultures by style and type through video, photographic, and museum evidence.
    2. Identify unique cultural characteristics of each society as well as the factors that led to their formation (i.e., mummification, immolation, architectural styles).
    3. Analyze archaeological and material culture evidence from various sites through field study reports, worksheets, and photographic documentation to interpret cultural behaviors.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to identify and demonstrate knowledge of archaeological techniques and practices.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Identify archaeology as a sub-science of anthropology; identify the characteristics and areas of study within it.
    2. Identify and discuss technical knowledge as to how to locate a site and set up a research project.
    3. Identify and discuss various material evidence and the characteristics of each (Lithics, Fossils, Features, Ecofacts).
    4. Utilize and identify methods of dating material finds from archaeological digs (i.e., stratigraphy, typology, Carbon 14, KA, etc.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to recognize anthropological and archaeological ethical issues arising from the study of past cultures.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Describe and discuss the ethical issues involved in artifact repatriation and NAGPRA.
    2. Describe and discuss ethical issues involved in working with human remains.
    3. Describe the potential issues facing anthropologists as they strive for cultural relativism (i.e., dealing with girl murder, female genital mutilation, differences in valuation of human life, etc.).

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to recognize alternative perspectives of previous human cultural behavior and how they compare and contrast with those of various living societies of today.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Describe and discuss the evolution of cultural practices as human society increased in complexity.
    2. Identify environmental and societal reasons for behaviors no longer common in our society.
    3. Compare and contrast those behaviors with those of societies at varying levels of complexity in more modern centuries.

    Outcome 5: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to apply critical thinking skills to anthropology.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Analyze and evaluate archaeological information from various sites through written and verbal reports.
    2. Interpret data and formulate an informed opinion through research and report production on a compare/contrast basis between various ancient cultures.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Orientation: Syllabus and course overview
      1. What is archaeology? Definition of archaeology and placement within the wider field of Anthropology
      2. Ancient Civilization: Neanderthal and Cro Magnon
    2. How Do You Do It? Site location and setting up a dig
      1. Project: Setting up a dig
      2. Ancient Civilization: Catal Huyuk, Ur
    3. What do you look for? The types of material culture and how to identify them
      1. Ancient Civilization: Egypt (mummification)
    4. OK, now that you’ve found it, what are you going to do with it? Methods of dating
      1. Stratigraphy project
      2. Ancient Civilization: North and South American Rock Shelters
    5. But what IS it? How do we place it in its context?
      1. Typologies
      2. Project: Burials of Bilj I
      3. Ancient Civilization: Minoan Crete
    6. What was it used for? Object analysis. What does context tell us? What is “in situ”? Why is that important? How does ethnology and research help us?
      1. Project: Study of Mayan/Aztec/etc. Ball Courts
      2. Ancient Civilization: Mayan
    7. Who the heck were these people? What can we know about them for sure? How does archaeological evidence help us know?
      1. Project: Comparisons of Rock Art
      2. Ancient Civilization: Indian - Harrapan
    8. Midterm
      1. Architecture and Features - What can they tell us about lifeways?
      2. Ancient Civilization: Stonehenge and other henges
    9. What did they do all day? Subsistence activities, domestication
      1. Project: Dentition and Anatomical Analysis
      2. Ancient Civilization: Native American Tribes - Southwest
    10. What do they believe in? Religion. Who were the original shamans and priests?
      1. Project: Burials of Bilj II
      2. Ancient Civilization: Southeast Asia, Angkor Wat
    11. Who did what? Archaeology and gender. What can we know about gender roles?
      1. Project: Participant Observation
      2. Ancient Civilization: The Moundbuilders
    12. What do they think? Myths, Magic, Witchcraft, Creation Stories, Supernatural Explanations. What archaeology tells us.
      1. Project: Creation Stories
      2. Ancient Civilization: Aztec
    13. What did they do all day II? Leisure activities through archaeological evidence
      1. Project: Egyptian game playing
      2. Ancient Civilization: Athenian Greece
    14. What did they eat? How did they prepare it? Archaeological perspectives on cooking
      1. Project: Cook like a Roman!
      2. Ancient Civilization: Roman Pompeii
    15. Who did they know? Trade and trade routes
      1. The diffusion of technology and traditions
      2. Ancient Civilization: China and Mongolia
    16. Review and Final Exam

    Primary Faculty
    Meier, Mary
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Mirijanian, Narine



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ANTH 2280 - Forensic Anthropology


    Credits: 4.00
    (4 contact hrs)
    (formerly ANTH-2914) This course is an introduction to the field of Forensic Anthropology. Using a lecture and laboratory format, the course will instruct the student in the correct examination of the human skeleton and its biological features. Such aspects will include osteology, building a biological profile, and the use of complementary disciplines in the identification of remains.

    Pre & Co Requisite(s): Prerequisite: ANTH-1000 or ANTH-1100 or ANTH-1200 or BIOL-2710
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to explain the field of forensic anthropology and its applications in human skeletal analysis.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify correlating fields of study in forensics.
    2. Acquire interpretative techniques in dealing with human remains.
    3. Perform the recovery, preparation, and analysis of human skeletal remains.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to use scientific language to describe skeletal osteology, bone biology, anatomy, and physiology of the human body.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify of all 206 bones of the human skeleton.
    2. Identify age, sex, ancestry, and stature of human remains.
    3. Identify of visible trauma on human remains.
    4. Analyze manner of death.
    5. Understand evidences of disease pathologies.
    6. Recognize the process of positive identification, facial reconstruction, and the role of the expert witness.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to integrate the scientific knowledge and methodologies of forensic anthropology with regards to the medico-legal field.

    Objectives:

    1. Properly report and present human remains case information.
    2. Examine the techniques and ethical sensitivities in the handling of human remains.

    Outcome  4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to use analytical skills to create case reports for medico-legal investigations.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify the types of information required for closure of medico-legal investigations.
    2. Complete a skeletal report.
    3. Describe the goals and use of forensic anthropological information.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    Week 1 - Introduction to Forensic Anthropology

    Week 2 - Techniques used in Forensic Anthropology

    Week 3 - Mapping a Crime Scene; Skeletal Development and Growth.

    Week 4 - Preparation of Human Remains.

    Week 5 - The Cranium.

    Week 6 - The Axial Skeleton

    Week 7 - The Appendicular Skeleton

    Week 8 - Case Studies

    Week 9 - Midterm

    Week 10 - Dentition. MNI and Relevance

    Week 11 - Sexing Skeletal Material

    Week 12 - Assessing Age for Skeletal Material

    Week 13 - Assessing Ancestry and Stature.

    Week 14 - Assessing Trauma and Providing Identification of Remains

    Week 15 - The Expert Witness and Course Wrap-Up


    Primary Faculty
    Meier, Mary
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Wilcox, Dee Ann



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088


Arabic Language & Culture

  
  • ARAB 1260 - Introduction to Arabic Language & Culture


    Credits: 4.00
    (5 contact hrs)
    (formerly ARAB-2920) This course is designed to introduce students to the Arabic speaking world and Arabic vocabulary and grammatical structures necessary to express personal meaning on basic topics. Students will engage in these activities within contextualized cultural settings. The vocabulary and grammatical structures are integrated into interactive and communicative activities that emphasize all four language skills: speaking, listening, reading, and writing. Students are required to use computer based technology to practice these skills.

    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate basic oral and written language skills.

    Objectives: During the course, students will:

    1. Demonstrate approximate standard Arabic pronunciation (alphabet and phonology).
    2. Initiate basic conversations with educated speakers of Arabic (fluency of speech).
    3. Use basic vocabulary of Arabic (mastery of elementary lexical items).
    4. Use basic grammar of Arabic (control of basic structures and forms).
    5. Read and write simple sentences in Arabic.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to recognize and discuss aspects of Arabic culture.

    Objectives: During the course, students will:

    1. Identify customs of Arabic people.
    2. Compare cultural differences.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Introduction to the Arabic alphabet
      1. Handout of the alphabet with pronunciation
      2. Handwriting and drills
    2. Handwriting and drills
      1. Review
      2. First quiz
    3. Review
      1. Connect letters to form your words
      2. Group work and discussion “culture talks”
    4. Handwriting and drills
      1. Culture lesson on “Meeting and greeting People” in the Arab world
    5. Review
      1. New words used in daily life
      2. Connecting letters to form your words
    6. Handwriting and drills
      1. How to address men and women in Arabic
      2. Group work and conversation
    7. Review
      1. Handwriting and drills
      2. Culture lesson on “respect among Arabic speaking people”
      3. Group work and conversation
    8. Review
      1. New words to learn and days of the week
      2. The seasons
    9. Handwriting and drills
      1. Culture lesson on greeting males and females
      2. Verbs, nouns and adjectives
      3. Class work: write your own sentences
      4. Group work and conversation
    10. Board work
      1. Handwriting and drills
      2. Writing numbers and names. Addressing envelops
      3. Culture lesson on “Family and coffeehouses”
    11. Board work
      1. Drills
      2. Group work: translation, conversation and writing short sentences
      3. Handout on time and climate
    12. Board work and group conversation
      1. Handwriting and drills
      2. Handout “In the city and at the Market”
      3. Write short sentences and translation
      4. Culture lesson on “Visiting and manners”
    13. Board work and group conversation
      1. Handwriting and drills
      2. Handout on a list of adjectives, verbs and nouns
      3. Group work: make your own sentences
      4. Culture lesson on holidays and other occasions
    14. Reading short passages
      1. Writing sentences and connecting letters
    15. Review for the final
      1. Conversations and short sentences
    16. Written and oral final exams

    Primary Faculty
    Rahmouni Elidrissi, Amine
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Kelly, Michele



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ARAB 1270 - Elementary Arabic 2


    Credits: 4.00
    (5 contact hrs)
    (formerly ARAB-2911) This course continues students’ development of Arabic language and culture by building and expanding on the culture, vocabulary and language structures learned in ARAB-1260. New language functions will be presented in meaningful activities that emphasize all four language skills: speaking, listening, reading, and writing and allow for further cultural exposure. Students are required to use computer based technology to practice these skills.

    Pre & Co Requisite(s): Prerequisite: ARAB-1260 or two or more years of high school Arabic
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate competency in oral language skills beyond Introduction to Arabic Language & Culture.

    Objectives:

    1. Pronounce individual sounds, including appropriate intonation and stress, with little or no interference in order to be understood by a Native Speaker.
    2. Form and produce entire sentences with no hesitation and natural pauses.
    3. Engage in conversations with a Native Speaker in the present, future, and past tense (includes both initiating conversations as well as responding appropriately to speech of a Native Speaker).

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate the ability to use Arabic vocabulary beyond Introduction to Arabic Language & Culture.

    Objectives:

    1. Use vocabulary when speaking.
    2. Respond to a Native Speaker who has used the vocabulary.
    3. Use vocabulary in writing.
    4. Demonstrate reading comprehension skills by discussing subject matter and/or answering questions based on the passage read.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate the ability to use grammar structures beyond Introduction to Arabic Language & Culture 1 in speaking and writing.

    Objectives:

    1. Use pronouns, including possessive.
    2. Form questions.
    3. Use adverbs.
    4. Use prepositions with pronouns.
    5. Conjugate the superlative and future tenses.
    6. Shape subject-verb agreement.
    7. Conjugate and use the verb to wish.
    8. Use the comparative.
    9. Use feminine plural.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to recognize and discuss aspects of Arabic culture beyond Introduction to Arabic Language & Culture 1.

    Objectives:

    1. Recognize and discuss some geographical, economical and cultural aspects of some Arabic speaking countries and/or communities such as universities and schools, food, sports, Ramadan, and clothes.
    2. Compare cultural differences.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    Lesson Topics

    1 pgs 1-19
    Masculine and feminine
    The definite article
    The Nisba adjective
    The question
    Arabic names

    2 pgs 21-35
    Pronouns - Grammar
    Reading and Culture

    3 pgs 39-53
    Possessive pronouns - Grammar
    Reading about Arab universities

    4 pgs 55-68
    The present tense
    More about questions
    Reading and Culture

    5 pgs 77-88
    Grammar - adverbs
    Non-adjective phrases
    Reading - climate and the seasons
    Culture - song for Fayrouz

    6 pgs 89-102
    Grammar
    Reading and Culture
    The Arabic foods

    7 pgs 106-125
    Culture and Grammar
    Prepositions with pronouns
    Reading - Arabic money

    8 pgs 129-151
    Grammar - the past tense - negation of past tense - roots and patterns
    The Arabic dictionary
    Numbers 11-100
    Reading and Culture - soccer game

    9 pgs 154-168
    Grammar - non-human agreement
    What time is it?
    Reading - American TV programs

    10 pgs 174-191
    Grammar - object pronouns
    Reading - King Fouad

    11 pgs 195-216
    Review verb chart
    Reading - hotels in Cairo

    12 pgs 217-240
    Grammar - the superlative - the future
    Future negation - subject-verb agreement
    Reading - school in Egypt
    Culture - song for Fayrouz

    13 pgs 241-260
    Grammar - verb to wish
    Reading - apartment for rent

    14 pgs 263-284
    Reading - Kholid’s grandmother and job wanted

    15 pgs 285-301
    Grammar - verbs and pronouns
    Reading - private window and Tounis

    16 pgs 308-324
    Grammar - the comparative
    Case markings
    Culture - Nizar Kobani the love poet
    Reading - the letter

    17 pgs 331-351
    Grammar - the nouns
    Culture - The Quoraan
    Reading - Time of Study in Ramadan

    18 pgs 352-368
    Culture - Jamal Abud El Nasar and oum Kalthoom
    Reading - The other half

    19 pgs 375-392
    Grammar - feminine plural
    Culture - clothes
    Reading - Najib Mahfouz

    20 pgs 395-411
    Grammar - reading dates - review
    Reading - Malek speaks


    Primary Faculty
    Rahmouni Elidrissi, Amine
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Kelly, Michele



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ARAB 2360 - Intermediate Arabic 1


    Credits: 4.00
    (5 contact hrs)
    ARAB-2360 Third-semester Arabic picks up where second-semester Arabic (ARAB-1270) has ended. The central goal is to advance the student’s communicative ability and cultural competency with an emphasis on assimilating the language for complex communicative purposes. In addition to Modern Standard Arabic (MSA), students will also practice one of the spoken dialects, the Egyptian, the Levantine, or the Moroccan dialects. The instructor will use authentic materials including texts from print Arabic media, video, and audio from the Middle East.

    Pre & Co Requisite(s): Prerequisite: ARAB-1270
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, The students will be able to demonstrate competency in oral language skills beyond Elementary Arabic 2.

    Objectives:

    1. Pronounce individual sounds, including appropriate intonation and stress, with little or no interference in order to be understood by a Native Speaker.
    2. Form and produce entire sentences with no hesitation and natural pauses.
    3. Engage in conversations with a Native Speaker in the present, future, or past tense about the following topics (includes both initiating conversations as well as responding appropriately to speech of a Native Speaker).
      1. Tourism, past travels and planning a trip to the Arab world.
      2. Study abroad options for Arabic language students.
      3. The workplace and applying for a job.
      4. Dilemmas and problem-solving.
      5. Religious holidays in the Arab world and authentic celebrations.
      6. Differences and similarities within different Arabic countries.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate the ability to use Arabic vocabulary beyond Elementary Arabic 2.

    Objectives:

    Regarding topics such as travel in the Arabic world, study abroad, job applications, directions, religious holidays and the diversity of the Arabic world:

    1. Use vocabulary when speaking.
    2. Respond to a Native Speaker who has used the vocabulary.
    3. Use vocabulary in writing.
    4. Demonstrate reading comprehension skills by discussing subject matter and/or answering questions based on the passage read.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate the ability to use grammar structures beyond Elementary Arabic 2 in speaking and writing.

    Objectives:

    1. Conjugate the present, past and future tense using the system of prefixes, suffixes and verb patterns.
    2. Use of the descriptive sentence.
    3. Use of adjectives, nouns, and adverbs; make comparisons using comparatives and superlatives.
    4. Understand the grammatical function and employ nouns ending in double open vowels.
    5. Review personal, object and possessive pronouns.
    6. Understand and employ the definite and indefinite construct phrase.
    7. Use relative pronouns.
    8. Use the impersonal construction.
    9. Use different case marking of nouns.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to recognize and discuss aspects of Arabic culture beyond Elementary Arabic 2.

    Objectives:

    1. Recognize and discuss some geographical, economical and cultural aspects of some Arabic speaking countries and or communities such as city life, work, holidays and celebrations, higher education.
    2. Compare cultural differences and underline similarities.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Travel and tourism in the Arab world
      1. Vocabulary of the textbook story and travel
      2. Verb conjugation and the system of prefixes and suffixes
      3. Personal, object and possessive pronouns
      4. The descriptive sentence (joumlat a-Sifa)
      5. Two new verb patterns
      6. Study of travel itineraries and maps
      7. Planning a trip to the Arab world
    2. Exploring potential Arabic study abroad programs.
      1. Vocabulary of the textbook story and study travels
      2. The future verb and its negation
      3. Nouns ending in double open vowels (al-ism almanSoub)
      4. Verb-Subject agreement in a verb-sentence
      5. The Superlative
      6. Researching potential study abroad programs and comparing different programs and destinations.
    3. Applying for admission in a study abroad program in the Arab world
      1. Vocabulary of the textbook story and letter writing
      2. The continuation of an action into the present
      3. Sentence Complements
      4. The past tense and its different forms of negations
      5. Review of all tenses and their negations: the Present, the Past and the Future
      6. Writing a letter of application to a study abroad program in the Arab world
    4. Creating a resume and looking for a job
      1. Vocabulary of the textbook story and job search
      2. Roots, patterns and the usage of the Arabic dictionary
      3. The noun-sentence and description of places
      4. Expressing wishes and hopes
      5. The definite and indefinite construct phrase
      6. Creating a resume
    5. Expressing dilemmas and giving advice
      1. Vocabulary of the textbook story
      2. Relative pronouns
      3. Review of all the different negations
      4. Conditionals
      5. The impersonal construction “It is….” As in “It is necessary to, it is difficult to, it is important to…”
      6. Expressing a detailed account of a problem and offering solutions and advice
    6. Preparing and presenting an exposé on an Arabic country
      1. Vocabulary of the story and country presentations
      2. The comparative
      3. Two new verb patterns
      4. Part I : Case marking of nouns
      5. Exposé on an Arabic country
    7. Muslim and Christian Arabic religious holidays
      1. Vocabulary of the story and celebrations of religious holidays in the Arab world
      2. Two new verb patterns
      3. Part II : Case marking of nouns
      4. Reading and study of fully vocalized Arabic religious texts.
      5. Review of the oral and written final exam

    Primary Faculty
    Rahmouni Elidrissi, Amine
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Kelly, Michele



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088


Art

  
  • ARTT 1060 - Basic Drawing 1


    Credits: 3.00
    (6 contact hrs)
    Basic drawing skills for both commercial and fine art. Introductions to elements of drawing, perspective, and drawing media, such as charcoal, ink, conte crayon, pencil, etc. Composition with still life and landscape. Required for pre-art majors.

    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to utilize drawing vocabulary.

    Objectives: During the course, students will:

    1. Learn the drawing terminology.
    2. Keep a sketchbook/ journal of drawing terms and practice.
    3. Identify the different drawing media

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to create several fundamental charcoal drawings.

    Objectives: During the course, students will:

    1. Discuss the benefits of using charcoal.
    2. Discuss the limitations of using charcoal.
    3. Create a significant charcoal drawing from observation.
    4. Identify a charcoal drawing.

    Outcome3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to create a fundamental graphite drawing.

    Objectives: During the course, students will:

    1. Discuss the benefits of using graphite.
    2. Discuss the limitations of using graphite.
    3. Create a significant graphite drawing from observation.
    4. Identify a graphite drawing.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to create a fundamental drawing using perspective techniques

    Objectives: During the course, students will:

    1. Create a drawing using 1 point perspective.
    2. Create a drawing using 2 point perspective.

    Outcome 5: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to create a fundamental composition

    Objectives: During the course, students will:

    1. Create a drawing using formal composition techniques.
    2. Create a drawing using informal composition techniques.
    3. Explain how composition is used in fine art.

    Outcome 6: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to understand the long history of drawing and its relevance in art history.

    Objectives: During the course, students will:

    1. Identify the proper tools for drawing.
    2. Identify significant artists who have used drawing.

    Outcome 7: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate the importance of properly presenting artwork.

    Objectives: During the course, students will:

    1. Present drawings in a professional manner
    2. Discuss the merit of drawings in front of the class.
    3. Prepare drawings for portfolio review
    4. Prepare drawings for exhibition

    Outcome 8: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate safe work habits and use proper shop etiquette in a studio environment.

    Objectives: During the course, students will:

    1. Use appropriate safety standards.
    2. Use tools and materials properly.
    3. Follow proper studio methodology.

    Outcome 9: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate the importance of working from direct observation.

    Objectives: During the course, students will:

    1. Work directly from a still life in class
    2. Set up a still life at home to work from
    3. Identify techniques for drawing from direct observation
    4. Identify basic proportional techniques for drawing from direct observation

    Outcome 10: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to identify the different drawing papers and their use.

    Objectives: During the course, students will:

    1. Create a drawing using charcoal paper
    2. Create a drawing using drawing paper
    3. Create a drawing using newsprint

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    Project 1: blind contour
    Project 2: gesture drawing
    Project 3: value scales with charcoal and graphite
    Project 4: drapery
    Project 5: perspective
    Project 6: composition
    Project 7: critique paper
    Primary Faculty
    Mitchell, Todd
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Kelly, Michele



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ARTT 1070 - Basic Drawing 2


    Credits: 3.00
    (6 contact hrs)
    Continuation of ARTT-1060 with greater emphasis oncomposition, rendering, perspective, and personal expression. Required for pre-art majors.

    Pre & Co Requisite(s): Prerequisite: ARTT-1060
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to utilize an advance drawing vocabulary.

    Objectives: During the course, students will:

    1. Learn the drawing terminology.
    2. Keep a sketchbook/ journal of drawing terms and practice.
    3. Identify the different black and white drawing media
    4. Identify the different color drawing media

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to create several advanced charcoal drawings.

    Objectives: During the course, students will:

    1. Discuss the benefits of using charcoal.
    2. Discuss the limitations of using charcoal.
    3. Create a significant charcoal drawing from observation.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to create an advanced graphite drawing.

    Objectives: During the course, students will:

    1. Discuss the benefits of using graphite.
    2. Discuss the limitations of using graphite.
    3. Create a significant graphite drawing from observation.
    4. Identify a graphite drawing.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to create an advanced drawing using 2 and 3 point perspective techniques

    Objectives: During the course, students will:

    1. Create a drawing using 2 and 3 point perspective.

    Outcome 5: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to convey emotion by using drawing techniques.

    Objectives: During the course, students will:

    1. Create a group of drawings that convey emotion based on the use of media.

    Outcome 6: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to develop use of creativity.

    Objectives: During the course, students will:

    1. Illustrate a story or poem to develop a concept.
    2. Create a drawing based on their own concept.

    Outcome 7: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate the importance of properly presenting artwork.

    Objectives: During the course, students will:

    1. Present drawings in a professional manner
    2. Discuss the merit of drawings in front of the class.
    3. Prepare drawings for portfolio review
    4. Prepare drawings for exhibition
    5. Matte and frame artwork

    Outcome 8: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate safe work habits and use proper shop etiquette in a studio environment.

    Objectives: During the course, students will:

    1. Use appropriate safety standards.
    2. Use tools and materials properly.
    3. Follow proper studio methodology.

    Outcome 9: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate the importance of working from their own imagination.

    Objectives: During the course, students will:

    1. Work directly from a still life in class in abstract
    2. Develop a drawing based on their own imagination
    3. Identify basic proportional techniques for drawing imagination

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    Session and Topic:
    Project 1: blind contour
    Project 2: 3 point perspective
    Project 3: developing concept and imagination
    Project 4: story/poem illustration
    Project 5: color
    Project 6: abstraction/distortion
    Project 7: critique paper
    Primary Faculty
    Mitchell, Todd
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Kelly, Michele



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ARTT 1360 - Color & Design 1


    Credits: 3.00
    (6 contact hrs)
    Principles of design as a foundation for all work in art. Creative experimentation in two-dimensional design with line, shape, value, texture, and color in various media. Required for pre-art majors.

    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to design projects with basic elements of design.

    Objectives:

    1. Design projects using the elements of line, shape and form
    2. Incorporate hue, value, and intensity in their projects
    3. Use texture and perspective in their projects

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to apply the basic principles of design art projects.

    Objectives:

    1. Recognize elements of design and organization in works of art, contemporary and traditional
    2. Apply these principles by incorporating them into their projects

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Sources of Design
      1. Nature
        1. Selected examples in films and slides, lectures and discussions.
        2. Design problems involving studies in:
          1. Natural design formation
          2. Simplifying nature
          3. Abstraction in natural sources
          4. Design project from above
      2. Man-made geometric and/or architectural forms
        1. Selected examples in films and slides, lectures and discussions
        2. Sources of man-made and/or non-objective design forms
        3. The man-made environment
        4. Design project involving above concepts
    2. Studies in Visual Design
      1. Elements of art
        1. Line
          1. Shape
          2. Form
          3. Design project involving above concepts
        2. Color
          1. Hue
          2. Value
          3. Intensity
          4. Design project involving above concepts
      2. Texture and perspective as result of color and line
        1. Texture - selected examples in many materials
          1. Actual
          2. Implied
          3. Design problem
        2. Perspective (including volume)
          1. Actual
          2. Implied
          3. Design problem in volume
          4. Design problem in perspective
        3. Actual
        4. Implied
      3. Organization or composition
        1. Unity and variety, and design problem
        2. Harmony and contrast, and design problem
        3. Critique of designs
          1. Student
          2. Contemporary
          3. Traditional
      4. Audiovisual aids, field trips, and demonstrations as supplement to program

    Primary Faculty
    Rosbury, Daniel
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Kelly, Michele



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ARTT 1370 - Color & Design 2


    Credits: 3.00
    (6 contact hrs)
    Continuation of ARTT-1360. Color composition; color systems and phenomena. Three-dimensional approaches explored in paper, wood, plastic, metal, etc. Required for pre-art majors.

    Pre & Co Requisite(s): Prerequisite: ARTT-1360
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1 - Upon completion of this course, students will be familiar with 20th century color theorists

    1. List and reference various colorist theorists
    2. Resolve problems dealing with color techniques and strategies
    3. Apply color theory to their individual projects

    Outcome 2 - Upon completion of this course, students will be able to exhibit technical control within various media

    1. Utilize various design techniques to create advanced designs
    2. Utilize various collage elements to formulate a susatined color collage strategy.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    Weeks 1. & 2.

    a. Relationship of two colors each altering the perception of a third

    b. Slides of impressionists

    c. Collect color papers, etc.

     

    Week 3.

    a. Relationship of two colors each made to look similar by placement next to two other subtly altered colors

    b. Slides of impressionists

    c. Collect color papers, etc.

     

    Weeks 4. & 5.

    a. Study and produce the effects of transparency in painted color/forms

    b. Slides of cubism

    c. Collect examples of transparency in art, advertising, etc.

     

    Weeks 6. & 7.

    a. Application of transparency to developed plate derived from a natural object or portrait

    b. Slides of Avery, Bacon, expressionists

    c. Self-portraits

     

    Weeks 8. &  9.

    a. Study of chroma changes; drawing the intensity out of previous plate - toward paleness, toward middle grey, toward dark

    b. Expressionists

    c. Self-portraits

     

    Weeks 10., 11. & 12.

    a. Project involving colored linear space with string, wire, straws, dowels

    b. Modern sculpture Lachaise/Giacometti

    c. Self-portraits

     

    Week 13.

    a. Project involving colored linear space with string, wire, straws, dowels

    b. Brancusi, Moore, Bauhaus

     

    Week 14.

    a. Project involving color / form planar modular units

    b. Constructivists

    c. Visit Detroit Institute of Arts

     

    Week 15.

    a. Self-portrait in either 2-D or 3-D with color and form restrictions and encouragement to use original means of definition

    b. Portrait in 20th century art

    c. Local gallery exhibit

     


    Primary Faculty
    Rosbury, Daniel
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Kelly, Michele



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ARTT 1460 - Ceramics 1


    Credits: 3.00
    (6 contact hrs)
    Introduction to ceramic handcraft; design processes, hand building methods, throwing on the potter’s wheel, decoration, glazing, and firing. Center Campus.

    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate competence in ceramics using additive and reductive methods.

    Objectives: The student will complete:

    1. A coil built ceramics piece.
    2. A wet slab constructed ceramics piece.
    3. A wheel thrown ceramics piece.
    4. A reductive (carved) ceramic piece.

    Outcome 2: Upon the completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate competence in clay body usage.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Make a clay body from raw materials.
    2. Make a glaze from raw materials.
    3. Demonstrate and utilize basic ceramics terminology.

    Outcome 3: Upon the completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate competence in studio tools and equipment.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Use various hand tools for creating a ceramics piece.
    2. Demonstrate various firing temperatures in clay body firings.
    3. Load and unload ceramics kilns
    4. Load and unload raku kilns
    5. Demonstrate proper use of the ceramics wheel process.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate safe work habits and use proper studio etiquette in a studio environment.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Use appropriate safety standards.
    2. Use tools properly.
    3. Follow proper shop methodology.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    Session and Topic:

    1. Class introduction to ceramics studio and safety practices
    2. Coil building
    3. Clay bodies
    4. Slab building
    5. Slips and glazes
    6. Wheel throwing
    7. Kiln and firing
    8. Reductive ceramics
    9. Raku firing

    Primary Faculty
    Mitchell, Todd
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Kelly, Michele



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ARTT 1470 - Ceramics 2


    Credits: 3.00
    (6 contact hrs)
    Continuation of ARTT-1460. Emphasis on increased conceptual and technical skills, particularly wheel-throwing and leather-hard slab construction. Center Campus.

    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate the development of studio techniques in ceramics using additive and subtractive methods.

    Objectives: Students will:

    1. Use additive ceramics techniques for creation of an advanced ceramics form.
    2. Use formative ceramics techniques for creation of an advanced ceramics form.
    3. Use reductive ceramics techniques for creation of an advanced ceramics form.
    4. Use a combination of ceramics techniques for creation of an advanced ceramics form.
    5. Create a large ceramic piece.

    Outcome 2: Upon the completion of this course, students will demonstrate competence in glaze compositions.

    Objectives: Students will:

    1. Mix and maintain class glaze recipes.
    2. Document various glaze properties and results.

    Outcome 3: Upon the completion of this course, students will demonstrate competence in the operation of electric and gas fired kilns.

    Objectives: Students will:

    1. Load a bisque kiln.
    2. Load a glaze kiln.
    3. Load a gas fired kiln.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate safe work habits and use proper shop etiquette in a studio environment.

    Objectives: Students will:

    1. Use appropriate safety standards.
    2. Use tools properly.
    3. Follow proper shop methodology.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    Session and Topic:

    1. Introduction to the ceramics studio and safety practice
    2. Additive ceramics
    3. Reductive ceramics
    4. Mixing and maintaining glazes
    5. Kiln methodology
    6. Working in large scale

    Primary Faculty
    Mitchell, Todd
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Kelly, Michele



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ARTT 1480 - Ceramics 3


    Credits: 3.00
    (6 contact hrs)
    Advanced work in the art and craft of clay and glazes. Additive, reductive, and formative construction; lab practice; architectural scale ceramics; combining media, field trips. May be taken twice for credit. Center Campus.

    Pre & Co Requisite(s): Prerequisite: ARTT-1470
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to utilize techniques previously learned to make significant sculptural and functional ceramics pieces.

    Objectives: Students will complete:

    1. Select varied media and use various techniques to execute conceptual ceramics pieces.
    2. Use mixed media in creation of a significant ceramics piece.
    3. Create a large free standing ceramics piece to be utilized in an architectural setting.

    Outcome 2: Upon the completion of this course, students will demonstrate competence in glaze composition and firing.

    Objectives: Students will:

    1. Learn empirical formulas.
    2. Load glaze kiln and tend firing.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate safe work habits and use proper shop etiquette in a studio environment.

    Objectives: Students will:

    1. Use appropriate safety standards.
    2. Use tools properly.
    3. Follow proper shop methodology.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    Session and Topic:

    1. Class introduction, ceramic studio orientation, safety agreement, in class assignment
    2. Project #1 Create a mixed media ceramics piece
    3. Project #2 Critical thinking paper
    4. Project #3 Create a significant architectural scale ceramics piece
    5. Project #4 Field trip to see professional ceramics studio
    6. Project #5 Create a significant additive ceramics piece
    7. Project #6 Create a significant ceramics piece
    8. Project #7 Create a significant ceramics piece
    9. Project #8 Kiln methodology
    10. Project #9 Glaze methodology
    11. Final critique, last day of class

    Primary Faculty
    Mitchell, Todd
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Kelly, Michele



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ARTT 1620 - Fine Art Appreciation


    Credits: 3.00
    (3 contact hrs)
    (formerly ARTT 1610) Open to all students to develop insight and gain experience in the visual arts. Nonhistorical introduction to the aesthetic elements of architecture, sculpture, crafts, painting, drawing, printmaking, design, etc.

    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to identify the various mediums and their particular qualities.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Identify the components of two-dimensional art: drawing, painting, printmaking, photography & film.
    2. Express the components of three dimensional art: sculpture, craft media, and architecture.
    3. Identify the various periods and the language of architecture.
    4. Identify the movements in Western art.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of the course, the student will be able to apply fundamental art vocabulary:

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Critically analyze visual art forms through writing.
    2. Articulate the context of particular works of art.
    3. Identify the various periods.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of the course, the student will be able to identify the formal elements of design in art.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Recognize the organizing principles of design.
    2. Analyze the elements of design in context.
    3. Exercise critical evaluation of the elements.
    4. Identify form and content.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Learning to See
      1. Understanding Art
      2. Visual Elements
      3. Organizing Principles
    2. Two-Dimensional Media & Methods
      1. Drawing
      2. Painting
      3. Printmaking
      4. Photography & Film
    3. Three-Dimensional Media & Methods
      1. Sculpture
      2. Craft Media
      3. Architecture
    4. Art in Time
      1. Art Movements
      2. Western Art

    Primary Faculty
    Mitchell, Todd
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Kelly, Michele



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ARTT 1625 - Fine Art Appreciation: Travel Abroad


    Credits: 4.00
    (4 contact hrs)
    Open to all students to develop insight and gain experience in the visual arts through travel. Introduction to the aesthetic elements of architecture, sculpture, crafts, painting, drawing, printmaking, design, etc. This class will travel to European locations to appreciate real-world examples.

    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to identify the various media and their particular qualities through real world examples.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Identify the components of two-dimensional art through authentic example: drawing, painting, printmaking, photography, and film.
    2. Express the components of three-dimensional art through authentic example: sculpture, craft media, and architecture.
    3. Identify the movements in Western art and where they exist in context.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of the course, the student will be able to apply fundamental art vocabulary while observing actual artworks through a historical context:

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Critically analyze visual art forms through writing.
    2. Complete a visual journal of their observations obtained through travel.
    3. Articulate the historical context of the artwork of a particular international location through presentation.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of the course, the student will be able to identify the formal elements of design in art.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Recognize the elements of design through authentic examples.
    2. Analyze the elements of design through authentic examples.
    3. Exercise critical evaluation of the elements.
    4. Identify form and content.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of the course, the student will show a greater global competency through the appreciation of art in its original context.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Articulate the importance of visual art in the world through travel.
    2. Express the cultural significance of art in its location.
    3. Grasp their position as a global citizen through international travel.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    Week 1: On Campus

    1. Introduction to the class
    2. What to expect when travelling
    3. Introduction to the Arts
    4. How to appreciate art

    Week 2: Abroad

    1. Curriculum aligned with travel destinations

    Week 3: Abroad

    1. Curriculum aligned with travel destinations

    Week 4: On Campus

    1. Evaluation of trip
    2. Presentations

    Primary Faculty
    Mitchell, Todd
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Kelly, Michele



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ARTT 2060 - Life Drawing 1


    Credits: 3.00
    (6 contact hrs)
    Basic study of the human form. Includes anatomy, structural, and visual form. Required for pre-art majors.

    Pre & Co Requisite(s): Prerequisite: ARTT-1060
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate analytical methods of perceiving the human form.

    Objectives: During the course, students will:

    1. Identify a series of drawing terms within art historical images.
    2. Create an awareness of how to express thoughts and emotions using the figure in 2 dimensional drawings.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate an understanding of drawing concepts, materials and techniques.

    Objectives: During the course, students will:

    1. Produce a figure or portrait study in charcoal.
    2. Exhibit proper studio etiquette.
    3. Understand the different materials of drawing throughout art history.
    4. Apply modeling principals to visualized solid form.
    5. Apply compositional concepts in figure drawing.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate a basic knowledge of proportion of the human form.

    Objectives:

    1. Understand basic knowledge of skeletal anatomy.
    2. Understand basic knowledge of muscular anatomy.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Introduction to class, studio/ proper studio etiquette
    2. Project #1 the figure in space
    3. Project #2 skeletal anatomy
    4. Project #3 muscular anatomy
    5. Materials demonstration
    6. Project #4 compositional concepts
    7. Project #5 producing a portfolio
    8. Critical thinking paper

    Primary Faculty
    Mitchell, Todd
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Kelly, Michele



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ARTT 2070 - Life Drawing 2


    Credits: 3.00
    (6 contact hrs)
    Continuation of ARTT-2060 with greater development of personal skills. Center Campus.

    Pre & Co Requisite(s): Prerequisite: ARTT-2060
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of the course, the student will demonstrate advanced analytical methods of perceiving the human form.

    Objectives: During the course the student will:

    1. Apply advanced modeling principals to visualized solid form.
    2. Express an advanced awareness of how to express thoughts and emotions using the figure in 2 dimensional drawings

    Outcome 2: Upon the completion of the course, the student will demonstrate advanced ability to apply concepts and techniques to significant drawings.

    Objectives: During the course the student will:

    1. Produce advanced figure studies in charcoal.
    2. Apply significant compositional concepts in figure drawing.
    3. Produce advanced portrait studies in pastel.

    Outcome 3: Upon the completion of the course, the student will demonstrate an advanced knowledge of skeletal and muscular anatomy.

    Objectives: During the course the student will:

    1. Identify the skeletal structure of the human form in drawing
    2. Identify the muscular anatomy of the human form in a drawing

    Outcome 4: Upon the completion of the course, the student will demonstrate the different materials and techniques of drawing throughout art history.

    Objectives: During the course the student will:

    1. Identify a series of terms and art historical images
    2. Exhibit proper studio etiquette

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Introduction to class, studio/ proper studio etiquette
    2. Project #1 the figure in space
    3. Project #2 skeletal anatomy
    4. Project #3 muscular anatomy
    5. Project #4 Portraiture.
    6. Project #5 compositional concepts
    7. Project #6 producing a portfolio
    8. Critical thinking paper

    Primary Faculty
    Mitchell, Todd
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Kelly, Michele



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ARTT 2160 - Basic Painting 1


    Credits: 3.00
    (6 contact hrs)
    Abstract and realistic approaches for the technical handling of tools, pigments, and processes in acrylic and/or oil painting. Center Campus.

    Pre & Co Requisite(s): Prerequisite: ARTT-1060 Prerequisite: ARTT-1360
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to recognize the basic elements of painting.

    Objectives:

    1. Define and list basic painting volcabulary including identifciation of materials and tools.
    2. Use a variety of painting materials and tools.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to apply basic principles of painting.

    Objectives:

    1. Demonstrate the use of various paiting pallettes (e.g. grisaille, glazing, and tint)
    2. Demonstarte the use of various painting techniques (e.g. washes, flat tones, and gradations)    

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to appreciate the traditional richness and versatility of teh history of painting.

    Objectives:

    1. Develop skills based on awareness of the respresentation of such skills in historical works
    2. Reference great artistic works in their own developmental projects

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Introduction of materials and course outline
    2. 2-3 weeks of basic painting principals and vocabulary in notebook form (paper painting)
    3. 2-3 weeks in layering techniques (paper and board)
    4. 2-4 weeks in limited palette processes (paper and board or panel)
    5. 3-5 weeks in stretched canvas sustainment (one required)
    6. 1-2 weeks of research from painters in history
    7. 1 week in review for written exam

    Primary Faculty
    Rosbury, Daniel
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Kelly, Michele



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ARTT 2170 - Oil Painting - Painting 2


    Credits: 3.00
    (6 contact hrs)
    Classical handling of the medium with some research into contemporary methods and material. Center Campus.

    Pre & Co Requisite(s): Prerequisite: ARTT-2160
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to produce a sustained painting on stretched canvas from preliminary studies.

    Objectives:

    1. Learn about different types of supports (e.g. canvas, panels)
    2. Treat different types of supports with a variety of preparational priming methods
    3. Produce a final product that incorporates these strategies

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate an ability to paint color harmonies with compositional schemes and convert drawings into paintings.

    Objectives:

    1. Transcribe preliminary painting studies into a final sustained painting
    2. Apply competently specific palettes (e.g. flesh use of compliments for tonal applications, shadow, etc.) in the students’ final products

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to explain ideas and criteria in various works of art.

    Objectives:

    1. Define ideas and criteria within historical references
    2. Develop ideas in their creative abilities that parallel those within an historical reference.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Intro of materials and course outline.
    2. 2 weeks in preparation of panels and stretched canvasses.
    3. 3 - 4 week on intro assignments rotations (one from observation/one from photo source.
    4. 3 - 4 week planning a composition for sustainment using preliminary studies.
    5. 2 - 3 weeks converting a drawing to a painting.
    6. 2 - 3 weeks practicing with figurative apalettes.
    7. 2 - 3 weeks in reading and experimenting in paint from an artist of choice.

    Primary Faculty
    Rosbury, Daniel
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Kelly, Michele



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ARTT 2200 - Jewel & Metalwork


    Credits: 3.00
    (6 contact hrs)
    This course covers elements of design and production of handcrafted jewelry, small sculpture, and functional objects in metals and other media, including centrifugal casting (of “lost wax” and other organic models), gas and electric welding, and forging techniques. Students will work in construction (with sheet, wire, and other media). Center Campus.

    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to create a project design.

    Objectives: During the course the student will:

    1. Create original jewelry designs.
    2. Create original metalwork designs.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will become familiar with critical evaluation of their work and the work of others.

    Objectives: During the course the student will:

    1. Participate in a group critique.
    2. Evaluate and critique the merit of their work.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will demonstrate competence in the basic skills needed to construct and fabricate a piece of jewelry and/or metalwork.

    Objectives: During the course the student will use the following techniques:

    1. Cutting.
    2. Piercing.
    3. Soldering.
    4. Annealing.
    5. Casting.
    6. Finishing.
    7. Gas Welding.
    8. Forging techniques.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will become familiar with and demonstrate competence in basic studio etiquette and safety practices.

    Objectives: During the course the student will:

    1. Follow proper studio etiquette.
    2. Demonstrate hand tool safety practices.
    3. Demonstrate safe equipment use.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    Session and Topic:

    1. Introduction to class, studio/ safety orientation
    2. Project: Design
    3. Project: Riveting and soldering
    4. Tool demonstration
    5. Forming and rolling
    6. Project: Welding basics
    7. Project: Finishing
    8. Critical thinking paper
    9. Project: Forging basic

    Primary Faculty
    Mitchell, Todd
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Kelly, Michele



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ARTT 2210 - Jewel & Metalwork 2


    Credits: 3.00
    (6 contact hrs)
    This course is a continuation of ARTT-2200 with emphasis on greater individual direction and choice of media. Students will gain further experience in centrifugal casting, stone setting, advanced welding, and forging. Center Campus.

    Pre & Co Requisite(s): Prerequisite: ARTT-2200
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to create an advanced project design.

    Objectives: During the course the student will:

    1. Create advanced original jewelry designs drawings.
    2. Create advanced original metalwork designs drawings.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will become familiar with critical evaluation of their work and the work of others.

    Objectives: During the course the student will:

    1. Participate in a group critique.
    2. Evaluate and critique the merit of their work.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will demonstrate knowledge of the advanced skills need to construct and fabricate a piece of jewelry and/or metalwork.

    Objectives: During the course the student will use the following techniques:

    1. Cutting
    2. Piercing
    3. Soldering using intermediate and advanced techniques
    4. Annealing
    5. Lost wax casting
    6. Stone setting
    7. Finishing
    8. Welding

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will demonstrate competence in studio etiquette and safety practices.

    Objectives: During the course the student will demonstrate:

    1. Follow proper studio etiquette
    2. Hand tool safety practices
    3. Demonstrate safe equipment use

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Continue class, studio/ safety orientation
    2. Product Design
    3. Riveting and soldering
    4. Stone Setting
    5. Tool usage
    6. Repousse
    7. Forming and rolling
    8. Advanced Welding techniques
    9. Forging

    Primary Faculty
    Mitchell, Todd
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Kelly, Michele



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ARTT 2560 - Sculpture 1


    Credits: 3.00
    (6 contact hrs)
    Emphasis on basic techniques of modeling, casting, construction, and elementary carving. Abstract and figurative approaches. Center Campus.

    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to create a fundamental figurative sculpture.

    Objectives: During the course, students will:

    1. Discuss the limits of clay.
    2. Produce a figure or portrait study in clay (sculpture).
    3. Explain the kiln firing process.
    4. Make a one- and/or two-piece plaster mold.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to create a fundamental welded steel sculpture.

    Objectives: During the course, students will:

    1. Identify welding equipment.
    2. Produce a welded work (sculpture).

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to create a fundamental constructed wood sculpture.

    Objectives: During the course, students will:

    1. Identify different types of wood.
    2. Identify tools used in wood sculpture.
    3. Produce a constructed wood (sculpture).

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to create a fundamental cast sculpture.

    Objectives: During the course, students will:

    1. Make a wax positive.
    2. Explain the lost wax process.
    3. Explain the mold making process for casting in bronze.
    4. Produce a bronze (sculpture).
    5. Produce a variety of surfaces patinas.

    Outcome 5: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to create a fundamental carved stone sculpture.

    Objectives: During the course, students will:

    1. Identify different types of stone for carving.
    2. Identify the proper tools for stone carving.
    3. Produce a stone carving (sculpture).

    Outcome 6: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate fundamental knowledge of how to express thoughts and emotions in 3-dimensional form.

    Objectives: During the course, students will:

    1. Discuss the importance of finish and presentation to the total process of making sculpture.
    2. Discuss the materials of sculpture throughout history.

    Outcome 7: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate safe work habits and use proper shop etiquette in a studio environment.

    Objectives: During the course, students will:

    Use appropriate safety standards.
    Use tools properly.
    Follow proper shop methodology.


    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    Session and Topic:

    1. Introduction to class, studio/safety orientation
    2. Project #1 Relief sculpture
    3. Project #2 Three-dimensional fundamentals
    4. Project #3 Wood constructed sculpture
    5. Tool demonstration
    6. Project #4 Figurative sculpture
    7. Basic anatomy
    8. Project #5 Welded steel sculpture
    9. Project #6 Lost Wax casting
    10. Critical thinking paper

    Primary Faculty
    Mitchell, Todd
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Kelly, Michele



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ARTT 2570 - Sculpture 2


    Credits: 3.00
    (6 contact hrs)
    Continuation of ARTT-2560 with emphasis on greater individual direction and choice of media. Center Campus.

    Pre & Co Requisite(s): Prerequisite: ARTT-2560
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to create an advanced figurative sculpture.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Discuss the limits of clay.
    2. Produce a figure or portrait study in clay (sculpture).
    3. Explain the kiln firing process.
    4. Make a one- and/or two-piece plaster mold.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to create an advanced welded steel sculpture.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Identify welding equipment.
    2. Produce a welded work (sculpture).

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to create an advanced constructed wood sculpture.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Identify different types of wood.
    2. Identify tools used in wood sculpture.
    3. Produce a constructed wood (sculpture).

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to create an advanced cast sculpture.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Make a wax positive.
    2. Explain the lost wax process.
    3. Explain the mold making process for casting in bronze.
    4. Produce a bronze (sculpture).
    5. Produce a variety of surfaces patinas.

    Outcome 5: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to create an advanced carved stone sculpture.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Identify different types of stone for carving.
    2. Identify the proper tools for stone carving.
    3. Produce a stone carving (sculpture).

    Outcome 6: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate knowledge of the materials of sculpture throughout history.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Identify art terminology.
    2. Discuss art historical images.

    Outcome 7: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate advanced knowledge of how to express thoughts and emotions in 3-dimensional form.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Discuss the importance of finish to the total process of making sculpture.
    2. Discuss the importance of presentation to the total process of making sculpture.

    Outcome 8: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate safe work habits and use proper shop etiquette in a studio environment.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Use appropriate safety standards.
    2. Use tools properly.
    3. Follow proper shop methodology.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    Session and Topic:

    1. Introduction to class, studio/safety orientation
    2. Project #1 Flexible rubber mold and bronze casting
    3. Project #2 Metal fabrication
    4. Project #3 Wood constructed sculpture
    5. Tool demonstration
    6. Project #4 Figurative sculpture
    7. Basic anatomy
    8. Project #5 Working independently
    9. Project #6 Producing a portfolio
    10. Critical thinking paper

    Primary Faculty
    Mitchell, Todd
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Kelly, Michele



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ARTT 2580 - Sculpture 3


    Credits: 3.00
    (6 contact hrs)
    ARTT-2580 is for advanced sculpture making. Students gain a greater understanding of concepts and object making through advanced work in welding and the casting processes. Center Campus.

    Pre & Co Requisite(s): Prerequisite: ARTT-2560Prerequisite: ARTT-2570
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcomes 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate competence in developing advanced concepts expressed through sculpture.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Select varied media and use various techniques to execute conceptual sculptures
    2. Create advanced sculptures using welding techniques.
    3. Create advanced sculptures using the casting process.
    4. Create advanced sculptures using the lost wax casting process.
    5. Create a large free standing sculpture.

    Outcomes 2: Upon the completion of this course, students will be able to prepare a proposal and portfolio for a sculpture exhibition.

    Objectives: The student will

    1. Document their sculpture using current standards.
    2. Write an artist’s statement.
    3. Write a proposal for a sculpture exhibition.

    Outcomes 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate safe work habits and use proper shop etiquette in a studio environment.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Use appropriate safety standards.
    2. Use tools properly.
    3. Follow proper shop methodology.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Class introduction, sculpture studio orientation, safety agreement, in class assignment, model etiquette
    2. Project #1 advanced welding
    3. Project #2 critical thinking paper
    4. Project #3 Bronze casting
    5. Project #4 Lost wax bronze casting
    6. Project #5 documentation of art work
    7. Project #6 writing an artist statement
    8. Project #7 writing a exhibition proposal
    9. Project #8 Aluminum welded sculpture
    10. Project #9 Cast Aluminum sculpture
    11. Additional sculpture
    12. Additional sculpture
    13. Final critique, last day of class

    Primary Faculty
    Mitchell, Todd
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Kelly, Michele



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ARTT 2600 - Figurative Sculpture 1


    Credits: 3.00
    (6 contact hrs)
    (formerly ARTT-2922) This course introduces creation of sculpture art using the human figure. It covers a basic study and understanding of the human form in space, including anatomy, reduction, structure, and other sculpture practices. Center Campus.

    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate competence in executing introductory figurative sculptures that represent key elements of human anatomy.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Identify basic skeletal anatomy and structure.
    2. Identify basic muscular anatomy and structure.
    3. Reduce the human form at an exact scale and proportion.
    4. Select varied media and use various techniques to execute figurative sculptures.
    5. In clay, create a seated human figure showing the basics of the human sculptural form.
    6. In clay, create a muscular structure of the human form and translate that to a standing figurative sculpture.
    7. Create a figurative sculpture using the lost wax casting process.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to identify the history of the human form in sculpture.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Describe the history of figurative sculpture.
    2. Identify the significance of the history of figurative sculpture.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate safe work habits and use proper shop etiquette in a studio environment.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Use appropriate safety standards.
    2. Use tools properly.
    3. Follow proper shop methodology.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Class Introduction, Sculpture Studio Orientation, Safety Agreement, In-Class Assignment, Model Etiquette
    2. Introduction to anatomy project #1, Demonstration, Work on #1
    3. Start Seated Model #1
    4. Work on #1
    5. Work on #1
    6. Work on #1
    7. Work on #1
    8. Work on #1, Paper Assigned
    9. Introduction to #2 Standing Figure, Armature
    10. Build Armature
    11. Start Standing Figure #2
    12. Work on #2
    13. Work on #2
    14. Work on #2
    15. Work on #2
    16. Work on #2, Mid-term Critique, Introduction to Reclining Figure #3
    17. Work on #3
    18. Work on #3
    19. Work on #3
    20. Work on #3
    21. Work on #3
    22. Introduction to Bust #4
    23. Create Bust Armature, Work on Measurements
    24. Work on #4
    25. Work on #4
    26. Work on #4
    27. Work on #4
    28. Work on #4
    29. Introduction to Reproduction #5
    30. Work on #5
    31. Work on #5, Sketchbooks Due

    Primary Faculty
    Mitchell, Todd
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Kelly, Michele



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ARTT 2602 - Figurative Sculpture 2


    Credits: 3.00
    (6 contact hrs)
    (formerly ARTT-2923) This course extends creation of sculpture using the human figure. The student will gain a greater understanding of anatomy and structure through advanced work with the casting process. Center Campus.

    Pre & Co Requisite(s): Prerequisite: ARTT-2600Prerequisite: ARTT-2560
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate competence in executing advanced figurative sculptures that represent key elements of human anatomy.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Select varied media and use various techniques to execute figurative sculptures.
    2. In clay, create a seated human figure showing the basics of the human sculptural form.
    3. In clay, create a muscular structure of the human form and translate that to a standing figurative sculpture.
    4. Create a figurative sculpture using the lost wax casting process.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to identify the history of the human form in sculpture.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Describe the history of figurative sculpture.
    2. Identify the significance of the history of figurative sculpture.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate safe work habits and use proper shop etiquette in a studio environment.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Use appropriate safety standards.
    2. Use tools properly.
    3. Follow proper shop methodology.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Class Introduction, Sculpture Studio Orientation, Safety Agreement, In-Class Assignment, Model Etiquette
    2. Introduction to Anatomy Project #1, Demonstration, Work on #1
    3. Start Seated Model #1
    4. Work on #1
    5. Work on #1
    6. Work on #1
    7. Work on #1
    8. Work on #1, Paper Assigned
    9. Introduction to #2, Standing Figure, Armature
    10. Build Armature
    11. Start Standing Figure #2
    12. Work on #2
    13. Work on #2
    14. Work on #2
    15. Work on #2, Mid-Term, Critique, Introduction to Reclining Figure #3
    16. Work on #3, Introduce Lost Wax Casting
    17. Work on #3
    18. Work on #3
    19. Work on #3
    20. Introduction to Bust #4
    21. Create Bust Armature, Work on Measurements
    22. Work on #4, Work on Bronze Casting
    23. Work on #4, Work on Bronze Casting
    24. Work on #4, Work on Bronze Casting
    25. Work on #4, Work on Bronze Casting
    26. Work on #4
    27. Introductions to Reproduction #5
    28. Work on #5
    29. Work on #5, Sketchbooks Due
    30. Work on #5
    31. Work on #5
    32. Final Critique

    Primary Faculty
    Mitchell, Todd
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Kelly, Michele



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ARTT 2650 - Art of the Western World: Prehistory to Gothic


    Credits: 3.00
    (3 contact hrs)
    (formerly ARTT 2610) Survey of architecture, sculpture, painting from prehistoric era to the Renaissance. Outstanding personalities and historical background.

    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to discriminate between stylistic characteristics of Western and Islamic art historical periods from Prehistory through Gothic.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Recognized stylistic characteristics of Western and Islamic art historical periods from Prehistory through Gothic
    2. Define stylistic characteristics of Western and Islamic art historical periods from Prehistory through Gothic
    3. Compare stylistic characteristics of Western and Islamic art historical periods from Prehistory through Gothic

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to apply the vocabulary of art history as it pertains to art from Western and Islamic periods from Prehistory through Gothic.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Define key terms used in art historical analysis for periods of Western and Islamic art from Prehistory through Gothic
    2. Use key terms in an analysis of Western and Islamic art historical periods from Prehistory through Gothic

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to identify the formal elements of art.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Recognize the elements of form
    2. Recognize the elements of compositional design
    3. Analyze the relationship between form and content
    4. Evaluate the relationship between form and content

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    Unit 1

    1. Prehistory
    2. Ancient Near East
    3. Egyptian
    4. Aegean
    5. Early and Classical Greece

    Unit 2

    1. Hellenistic
    2. Etruscan
    3. Roman
    4. Early Roman Christian
    5. Byzantine

    Unit 3

    1. Early Medieval
    2. Romanesque
    3. Gothic
    4. Late Gothic/Early Renaissance

    Primary Faculty
    Mitchell, Todd
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Williams-Chehmani, Angie



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ARTT 2660 - Art of the Western World: Renaissance To Modern


    Credits: 3.00
    (3 contact hrs)
    (formerly ARTT 2620) Survey of architecture, sculpture, painting from the Renaissance through modern times. Outstanding personalities and historical background.

    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to discriminate between stylistic characteristics of Western art historical periods from the Renaissance through modern times.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Recognize stylistic characteristics of Western art historical periods from the Renaissance through modern times
    2. Define stylistic characteristics of Western art historical periods from the Renaissance through modern times
    3. Compare stylistic characteristics of Western art historical periods from the Renaissance through modern times

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to apply the vocabulary of art history as it pertains to art from Western periods from the Renaissance through modern times.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Define key terms used in art historical analysis for periods of Western art historical periods from the Renaissance through modern times
    2. Use key terms in an analysis of Western art historical periods from the Renaissance through modern times

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to identify the formal elements of art.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Recognize the elements of form
    2. Recognize the elements of compositional design
    3. Analyze the relationship between form and content
    4. Evaluate the relationship between form and content

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    Unit 1

    1. Renaissance Italy
    2. Northern (Netherlands)
    3. England
    4. Germany
    5. Venice

    Unit 2

    1. Baroque & Rococo
    2. Neoclassical
    3. Romantic & Realism

    Unit 3

    1. Post-Impressionism
    2. Early 20th Century
    3. Mid to Late 20th Century

    Primary Faculty
    Mitchell, Todd
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Kelly, Michele



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088


Astronomy

  
  • ASTR 1030 - General Astronomy 1


    Credits: 2.00
    (2 contact hrs)
    Descriptive course analyzing the solar system, historical aspects, including the astronomy of ancient civilizations and most important astronomers, and the instruments used by the astronomer.

    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES

    Outcome 1: The student will analyze the nature of scientific laws, models, and theories.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify the physical laws, models, and theories that are applicable to astronomical objects and phenomena.
    2. Describe physical laws, models, and theories that are applicable to astronomical objects and phenomena.
    3. Analyze and apply the physical laws, models, and theories that are applicable to astronomical objects and phenomena.
    4. Assess the testability of a hypothesis.
    5. Develop appropriate astronomical hypotheses.
    6. Analyze and interpret the success or failure of astronomical hypotheses.

    Outcome 2: The student will use appropriate specialized scientific vocabulary.

    Objectives:

    1. Define astronomical terminology.
    2. Recall astronomical terminology.
    3. Employ astronomical terminology.

    Outcome 3: The student will analyse the techniques used in observing and collecting data on astronomical objects and phenomena and how astronomical observations and data are analysed and interpreted.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify properties of electromagnetic radiation.
    2. Compare astronomical techniques of data acquisition.
    3. Interpret the observations and data acquired through various techniques.
    4. Perform calculations relevant to the phenomena of temperature conversions, stellar parallax, and basic carbon dating.
    5. Identify techniques used to study various astronomical objects and phenomena.
    6. Describe methods astronomers use to analyze collected data.

    Outcome 4: The student will identify the techniques for extending scientific laws and models from the laboratory setting to the observed universe.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify the scientific law or model to which the laboratory setting can be applied.
    2. Identify the laboratory setting that applies to particular scientific law or model.

    Outcome 5: The student will explain the earth’s place in the solar system, and the solar systems place within the universe.

    Objectives:

    1. Recall that the Earth is located in a spatial hierarchy consisting of the Solar System, the Milky Way Galaxy, the Local Group, and the Local Supercluster.
    2. Describe the organization of the Solar System. .

    Outcome 6: The student will interpret the sky.

    Objectives:

    1. Discern the color and magnitude differences between planets, the Sun, and the Moon.
    2. Describe the motion of the planets.
    3. Recognize that there are more objects in the solar system than can be viewed with the naked eye, and that there are objects that are viewable that are not within the solar system.
    4. Recognize the importance of telescopes for data acquisition, and recall the primary functions of the various types of telescopes.

    Outcome 7: The student will explain the historical perspective of the development of the scientific method and scientific laws.

    Objectives:

    1. Reconstruct the development of our understanding of the Earth’s place in the Universe from the historical beginnings to modern times.
    2. Describe the evolution of the scientific method and scientific laws.
    3. Describe the catalysts for the evolution of the scientific method and scientific laws.
    4. Identify the principle investigators of astronomical concepts.
    5. Describe the contributions of the principle investigators to the development of the scientific method and scientific laws.
    6. Identify the primary differences between the pseudoscience astrology and the science of astronomy and the evolution of astrology to astronomy.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Historical Astronomy
      1. Prehistoric Astronomy
      2. Development of Calendars and other Early Discoveries
      3. Origin of the Constellations
      4. The Seasons
      5. Eclipses
      6. Astrology and the Origin of other Superstitions
      7. Egyptian Cosmology
      8. Early Greek Cosmologies
      9. The Ptolemaic System
      10. Islamic Astronomy
    2. The Layout of the Solar System
      1. Problems with the Ptolemaic Model
      2. The Copernican Revolution
      3. Tycho Brahe
      4. Kepler’s Laws
      5. Galileo’s Observations
      6. Newton’s Synthesis
    3. Light and Telescopes
      1. Nature of Light
      2. The Electromagnetic Spectrum
      3. The Origin of Light
      4. Emission Lines and Bands
      5. Absorption Lines and Bands
      6. Design of Optical Telescopes
      7. Photometry
      8. Image Processing
      9. Spectrophotometry
      10. Interferometry
      11. Telescopes in Space
    4. Earth as a Planet
      1. Age of the Earth
      2. Internal Structure
      3. Earth’s Magnetic Field
      4. Earth’s Evolution and Outside Catastrophic Events
      5. Earth’s Atmosphere and Oceans
      6. The Magnetosphere
    5. The Moon
      1. The Earth-Moon System
      2. Historical Observations of the Moon
      3. The Development of Space Exploration and Moon Exploration
      4. Surface Features of the Moon
      5. Lunar Rocks: Moon-Earth Comparison
      6. Interior of the Moon
      7. Evolution of the Moon
      8. Origin of the Moon
      9. Return to the Moon
    6. Mercury
      1. Rotation and Revolution of Mercury
      2. Historical Observation from the Earth
      3. Spacecraft Observations
      4. The Surface of Mercury
      5. Internal Structure of Mercury
      6. Mercury’s Atmosphere
      7. Mercury’s Magnetic Field
      8. Mercury’s Evolutionary History
      9. Comparative Planetology of Mercury
    7. Venus
      1. Slow Retrograde Rotation of Venus
      2. Historical Observations from the Earth
      3. Spacecraft Observations
      4. The Surface of Venus
      5. The Atmosphere of Venus
      6. The Internal Structure of Venus
      7. Comparative Planetology of Venus
    8. Mars
      1. Historical Observations from the Earth
      2. Spacecraft Observations
      3. Surface Geology of Mars
      4. The Atmosphere of Mars
      5. Current and Ancient Climate
      6. Martian Internal Structure
      7. The Search for Life
      8. Martian Satellites: Phobos and Demos
      9. Comparative Planetology of Mars
    9. Jupiter
      1. Rotation Rate
      2. Historical Observations from the Earth
      3. Spacecraft Observations
      4. The Atmosphere of Jupiter
      5. Internal Heating of Jupiter
      6. Internal Structure of Jupiter
      7. Jupiter’s Magnetosphere
      8. Jupiter’s Rings
      9. The Moons of Jupiter
      10. Comparative Planetology of Jupiter
    10. Saturn
      1. Rotation Rate
      2. Historical Observations from the Earth
      3. Spacecraft Observations
      4. The Atmosphere of Saturn
      5. Internal Heating of Saturn
      6. Internal Structure of Saturn
      7. Saturn’s Magnetosphere
      8. Saturn’s Rings
      9. The Moons of Saturn
      10. Comparative Planetology of Saturn
    11. Uranus, Neptune, and the Dwarf Planets
      1. Discovery of these Planets
      2. Spacecraft Observations
      3. Physical Nature of Uranus and Neptune
      4. Interiors of Uranus and Neptune
      5. Atmospheres of Uranus and Neptune
      6. Rings of Uranus and Neptune
      7. Magnetosphere of Uranus and Neptune
      8. Comparative Planetology of Uranus and Neptune
      9. The Satellite Systems of Uranus and Neptune
      10. Pluto and the other Dwarf planets and their moons
    12. Comets, Meteors, and Asteroids
      1. Origin of Asteroids
      2. Nature of Asteroids
      3. Origin of Meteoroids
      4. Distinction Between Meteoroids, Meteors, and Meteorites
      5. Historical Concepts of Comets
      6. Origin of Comets
      7. Nature of Comets

    Primary Faculty
    Fey, Francette
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Young, Randall



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ASTR 1040 - General Astronomy 2


    Credits: 2.00
    (2 contact hrs)
    Descriptive course analyzing the universe outside our solar system: stars, galaxies, nebulae, and interstellar material; also a brief exploration of cosmology dealing with the main theories about the origin of the universe.

    Pre & Co Requisite(s): Prerequisite: ASTR-1030
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to analyze the nature of scientific laws, models, and theories.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify the physical laws, models, and theories that are applicable to astronomical objects and phenomena.
    2. Describe physical laws, models, and theories that are applicable to astronomical objects and phenomena.
    3. Analyze and apply the physical laws, models, and theories that are applicable to astronomical objects and phenomena.
    4. Assess (or Evaluate) the testability of a hypothesis.
    5. Develop appropriate astronomical hypotheses.
    6. Analyze and interpret the success or failure of astronomical hypotheses.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to use specialized scientific vocabulary.

    Objectives:

    1. Define astronomical terminology.
    2. Recall astronomical terminology.
    3. Employ astronomical terminology.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to analyze the techniques used in observing and collecting data on astronomical objects and phenomena, and how astronomical observations and data are analyzed and interpreted.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify properties of electromagnetic radiation.
    2. Compare astronomical techniques of data acquisition.
    3. Interpret the observations and data acquired through various techniques.
    4. Perform calculations relevant to the phenomena of Wien’s Law, the Inverse Square Law, temperature conversions, and stellar magnitudes.
    5. Identify techniques used to study various astronomical objects and phenomena.
    6. Describe methods astronomers use to analyze collected data.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to identify the techniques for extending scientific laws and models from the laboratory setting to the observed universe.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify the scientific law or model to which the laboratory setting can be applied.
    2. Identify the laboratory setting that applies to particular scientific law or model.

    Outcome 5: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to explain the Earth’s place in the universe.

    Objectives:

    1. Recall that the Earth is located in a spatial hierarchy consisting of the Solar System, the Milky Way Galaxy, the Local Group, and the Local Super cluster.
    2. Describe the Solar System, the Milky Way Galaxy, the Local Group, and the Local Super cluster.

    Outcome 6: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to iInterpret the sky.

    Objective:

    1. Discern the color differences between stars.
    2. Describe the diurnal motion of the stars.
    3. Recognize that there are more stars in the sky than are viewable with the naked eye.
    4. Locate Polaris, the North Star.

    Outcome 7: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to explain the historical perspective of the development of the scientific method and scientific laws.

    Objectives:

    1. Reconstruct the development of the Stellar Magnitude System, Hubble’s Law, the Big Bang Theory, Stellar Evolution, and our understanding of the Earth’s place in the Universe from the historical beginnings to modern times.
    2. Describe the evolution of the scientific method and scientific laws.
    3. Describe the catalysts for the evolution of the scientific method and scientific laws.
    4. Identify the principle investigators of astronomical concepts.
    5. Describe the contributions of the principle investigators to the development of the scientific method and scientific laws.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Light
      1. The Nature of Light
      2. The Electromagnetic Spectrum
      3. The Origin of Light
      4. Emissions Lines and Bands
      5. Absorption Lines and Band
      6. Design of Optical Telescopes
      7. Photometry
      8. Spectrophotometry
      9. Interferometry
    2. The Sun
      1. Composition of the Sun
      2. Interior Structure
      3. The Photosphere
      4. The Chromosphere
      5. The Corona
      6. The Magnetic Field
      7. The Solar Wind
      8. Sunspots and Related Activity
      9. The Solar Constant
      10. Terrestrial Effects
      11. The Sun and the Theory of Relativity
    3. Measuring the Basic properties of Stars
      1. Distance
      2. Apparent Brightness and the Magnitude System
      3. Luminosity and Absolute Magnitude
      4. Effective Temperature and Wien’s Law
      5. Diameter and Stephan-Boltzmann’s Law
      6. Mass and Kepler’s Laws
      7. Composition and Stellar Spectra
    4. Classifying Stellar Types
      1. The Hertzsprung-Russel Diagram
      2. Main Sequence Stars
      3. White Dwarfs
      4. Giants and Supergiants
    5. Early Stellar Evolution
      1. Molecular Clouds
      2. Bok Globules and the Protostar Stage
      3. Pre-Main Sequence Stars
      4. Cocoon Nebulae and Infrared Stars
      5. Brown Dwarfs
      6. T Tauri Stars
    6. Middle Aged Stars
      1. Main Sequence Stage
      2. The Proton-Proton Chain
      3. Larger Stars and the Carbon Cycle
      4. Main-Sequence Lifetimes
    7. Stellar Death and Transfiguration
      1. Red Giant Stars
      2. The Triple-Alpha Process
      3. Helium Flash
      4. Variable Stars
      5. Cepheid Variables
      6. Planetary Nebulae
      7. White Dwarfs
      8. The Chandrasekhar Limit
      9. Supernovae
      10. Type I and Type II Supernovae
      11. Neutron Stars and Pulsars
      12. Black Holes
      13. The Theory of Relativity and Detecting Black Holes
    8. Interstellar Environments
      1. Interaction of Light with Atoms
      2. Interaction of Light with Molecules
      3. Interaction of Light with Dust Grains
      4. Rayleigh Scattering
      5. Interstellar Reddening
      6. Molecular Clouds
      7. HI Regions
      8. HII Regions
      9. Bubbles and Superbubbles
    9. Multiple Star Systems
      1. Optical Doubles and Physical Binaries
      2. Visual Binaries
      3. Spectroscopic Binaries
      4. Eclipsing Binaries
      5. Astrometric Binaries
      6. Mass Transfer in Binary Star Systems
      7. Novae and Supernovae
      8. Origin of Binary Star Systems
      9. Planetary Systems
    10. Star Clusters and Associations
      1. Open Star Clusters
      2. Associations
      3. Globular Star Clusters
      4. Distances to Clusters
      5. Cepheid Variables as Distance Indicators
    11. The Milky Way Galaxy
      1. Size
      2. Stellar Surveys and the Galactic Shape
      3. Rotation
      4. Age
      5. Population I Stars
      6. Population II Stars
      7. The Nucleus
      8. Spiral Arms
    12. Galaxies
      1. Measuring Distances to the Galaxies
      2. The Magellanic Clouds
      3. The Local Galaxies
      4. Dwarf Galaxies
      5. Elliptical Galaxies
      6. Spiral Galaxies
      7. Irregular Galaxies
      8. Peculiar Galaxies
      9. The Hubble Classification
    13. The Expanding Universe
      1. The Red Shift of Galaxies
      2. Hubble’s Law
      3. The Static Universe
      4. The Expanding Universe
      5. The Big Bang
      6. Clusters of Galaxies
      7. Dark Matter
      8. Quasars
      9. The Age of the Universe
      10. Alternative Cosmologies
      11. The Search for Intelligent Life

    Primary Faculty
    Fey, Francette
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Young, Randall



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088


Applied Mathematics

  
  • ATAM 1150 - Mathematics - Shop Arithmetic


    Credits: 2.00
    (2 contact hrs)
    Review of basic arithmetic; whole numbers, fractions, decimals, signed numbers, grouping symbols, square root, ratio and proportion, flat and round tapers, simple and complex gear ratios; practical industrial shop problems are employed. South Campus.

    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, the learner will be able to describe applications of fractions (ratios) used to solve mechanical problems.

    Objectives:

    1. Using whole numbers, prime numbers, proper and improper fractions, solve problems with 80% accuracy.
    2. Using the correct method of addition, subtraction, multiplication, and division, solve problems with 80% accuracy.
    3. Using the correct method of addition, subtraction, multiplication, and division of decimal fractions, solve problems with 80% accuracy.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, the learner will be able to describe applications of the arithmetic processes using numbers.

    Objectives:

    1. Using the correct method of addition, subtraction, multiplication and division of signed numbers, solve problems with 80% accuracy.
    2. Using the correct method of calculating percentages, solve problems with 80% accuracy.
    3. Using the correct method of stating direct and indirect ratios, solve problems with 80% percent accuracy.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, the learner will be able to describe applications of arithmetic processes with ratio and proportion.

    Objectives:

    1. Using the correct method of establishing ratio and proportion, complex ratio and proportion, solve problems for unknown quantities with 80% accuracy.
    2. Using the correct method of establishing ratio and proportion, solve problems for mechanical tapers with 80% accuracy.
    3. Using the correct method of establishing ratio and proportion, solve problems for simple gear ratios with 80% accuracy.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Review whole numbers; Prime Numbers; Fractions (proper/improper)
    2. Fractions - Multiplication and Division
    3. Fractions - Addition and Subtraction
    4. Decimals - Addition and Subtraction
    5. Decimals - Multiplication and Division of Decimal Fractions
    6. Signed Numbers - Addition, Subtraction, Multiplication, and Division
    7. Signed Numbers - Continued
    8. Percent
    9. Ratio and Proportion
    10. Tapers
    11. Simple Gear Ratios

    Primary Faculty
    Gordon, Victoria
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Pawlowski, Timothy



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ATAM 1160 - Mathematics - Algebra


    Credits: 2.00
    (2 contact hrs)
    Fundamental operations of positive and negative numbers, grouping symbols, algebraic axioms, equations, special products and factoring. Solution of practical shop problems. South Campus.

    Pre & Co Requisite(s): Prerequisite: ATAM-1150 or consent of apprenticeship coordinator
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, the learner will be able to describe applications in order of operations in algebraic language.

    Objectives:

    1. Using signed numbers, exponents and square roots in algebraic expression, solve problems with 80% accuracy.
    2. Using the proper order of operations for adding and subtracting algebraic expressions, solve problems with 80% accuracy.
    3. Using the proper order of operations, solve simple algebraic expressions with 80% accuracy.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, the learner will be able to describe applications in solving algebraic equations.

    Objectives:

    1. Using the proper order of operations, solve algebraic equations involving two operations with 80% accuracy.
    2. Using the proper order of operations, solve for algebraic equation factoring and changing priorities with 80% accuracy.
    3. Using the proper order of operations for solve industrial formulas with 80% accuracy.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, the learner will be able to describe applications in solving algebraic expressions.

    Objectives:

    1. Using algebraic operations, solve industrial word problems with 80% accuracy.
    2. Using the proper order of operations in algebra, solve problems with multiplication and division of positive and negative numbers and exponents.
    3. Using the proper order of operations in algebra, solve problems with scientific notation, unit conversion and system equations.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Signed Numbers - Exponents and Square Roots
    2. Algebraic Language; Order of Operations
    3. Adding and Subtracting Algebraic Expressions; Like Terms
    4. Solving Simple Equations
    5. Equations Involving Two Operations
    6. More Equations; Removing Parentheses; Factoring
    7. Solving Formulas
    8. Solving Word Problems
    9. Multiplying and Dividing Algebraic Expressions; Positive and Negative Exponents
    10. Multiplying Similar Binomials by Inspection
    11. Scientific Notation; Conversions with Decimal; Multiplying and Dividing
    12. Unit Conversions
    13. Systems of Equations; Solution by Substitution; Dependent and Inconsistent Systems

    Primary Faculty
    Gordon, Victoria
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Pawlowski, Timothy



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ATAM 1170 - Mathematics - Geometry


    Credits: 2.00
    (2 contact hrs)
    Quadratic formula, review solutions, shop formulas. Definitions and description of geometric terms, axioms, and theorems. An explanation is given to propositions dealing with straight lines, triangles, and circles, with emphasis on applications to practical shop problems. South Campus.

    Pre & Co Requisite(s): Prerequisite: ATAM-1160 or consent of apprenticeship coordinator
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, the learner will be able to describe applications of Geometric Propositions.

    Objectives:

    1. Define the axioms and definitions in geometry for geometric angle measurement with 80% accuracy.
    2. Using the propositions of geometry angular theorems, solve angular geometry problems with 80% accuracy.
    3. Using the propositions of geometry of interior angles and triangles, solve geometry problems with 80% accuracy.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, the learner will be able to describe applications in applying geometry propositions for problem solution.

    Objectives:

    1. Using the specific proposition of geometry, solve problems using the Pythagorean theorem with 80% accuracy.
    2. Using the related propositions of geometry, solve problems using the projection formula with 80% accuracy.
    3. Using the related propositions of circular geometry, solve circular problems with 80% accuracy.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, the learner will be able to describe applications in applying geometry to solve mechanical problems.

    Objectives:

    1. Using the related propositions of geometry, solve mechanical problems with inscribed circles in triangles with 80% accuracy.
    2. Using the related propositions of geometry, solve mechanical problems with tangents and intersecting chords with 80% accuracy.
    3. Using the related propositions of geometry, solve mechanical problems with areas and volumes with 80% accuracy.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Introduction to Geometry, Axioms, Definitions, Points, Lines, Angles, Plane Figures
    2. Propositions 1-10: Opposite and Vertical Angles, Congruency, Parallel and Perpendicular Lines and Sum of the Interior Angles of a Triangle = 180°
    3. Propositions 11-15: Sum of Interior Angles = (N-2) x 180. Interior Angles = Sum of Opposite Interior Angles, Angles Equal if Sides Parallel Right to Right and Left to Left
    4. Propositions 16-30: Angles Equal - Sides Perp rt/rt/lt/lt Isosceles Triangles, Congruent rt, Triangles, Sets of Parallel Lines Cut by Transversal and Similar Triangles
    5. Proposition 31: Pythagorean Principles
    6. Proposition 32: Projection Formulas
    7. Propositions 33-37: Definitions #35-50 on Circles, Chords, Arcs, Diameter, Radius, Tangents, Secants, Central Angles, Inscribed Angles, and Polygons
    8. Propositions 38-40: Inscribed Circles in Right Triangles and Inscribed Angle of Measure
    9. Propositions 41-46: Square Inscribed in a Circle, Regular Hexagon Inscribed in a Circle, Circles, Tangents, External and Internal and Intersecting Chords
    10. Area and Volume Formulas of Planes and Solid Figures

    Primary Faculty
    Gordon, Victoria
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Pawlowski, Timothy



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ATAM 1350 - Mathematics - Arithmetic & Introductory Algebra for Electrical & Allied Crafts


    Credits: 2.00
    (2 contact hrs)
    An intensive review of arithmetic with emphasis on common and decimal fractions, ratio and proportion, percentage, and square root. Systems, units of measurement, and conversions. An introduction to algebra including terminology, additive functions, grouping symbols, axioms, basic procedures, multiplication and division. South Campus.

    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will complete math calculations for electrical and allied crafts.

    Objectives:

    1. The learner will use a calculator to solve problems.
    2. The learner will apply units and dimensions.
    3. The learner will add, subtract, multiply, and divide whole numbers, fractions and decimals - both longhand and with a calculator.
    4. The learner will use powers of ten and scientific notation on the calculator.
    5. The learner will transform and solve equations.
    6. The learner will convert units and solve associated problems.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Introduction to Course, Add, Subtract, Multiply, Divide, Fractions and Decimals
    2. Percentage, Powers, and Roots
    3. Algebraic Addition, Signs of Grouping
    4. Algebraic Multiplication
    5. Algebraic Multiplication and Division
    6. Equations
    7. Ratio and Proportions
    8. Powers of Ten, Scientific Notation
    9. Units and Dimensions
    10. Special Products and Factoring

    Primary Faculty
    Gordon, Victoria
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Pawlowski, Timothy



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ATAM 1360 - Mathematics - Electrical Circuitry - Algebra & Trigonometry


    Credits: 2.00
    (2 contact hrs)
    Sign numbers, grouping symbols, factoring equations in one unknown, fractions, fractional equations, exponents and radicals, solution of simultaneous equations, and introduction to j factor. South Campus.

    Pre & Co Requisite(s): Prerequisite: ATAM-1350 or consent of apprenticeship coordinator
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to complete math calculations for electrical circuitry.

    Objectives:

    1. Utilize a calculator to solve math problems.
    2. List the steps involved in solving an equation.
    3. Add, subtract, multiply, and divide whole numbers, fractions, and decimals, both longhand and with a calculator.
    4. Use powers of ten and scientific notation on the calculator.
    5. Transform and solve equations.
    6. Convert units and solve associated problems.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Ohm’s Law, Series Circuits
    2. Series Circuits
    3. Algebraic Fractions: Addition and Subtraction
    4. Algebraic Fractions: Multiplication and Division; Complex Fractions
    5. Fractional Equations
    6. Literal Equations, Fractional
    7. Parallel Circuits
    8. Series - Parallel Circuits
    9. Simultaneous Equations Addition, Subtraction, Substitution and Comparison
    10. Network Simplification
    11. Angles
    12. Trigonometry Functions
    13. Right Triangles

    Primary Faculty
    Gordon, Victoria
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Pawlowski, Timothy



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ATAM 2150 - Mathematics - Trigonometry


    Credits: 2.00
    (2 contact hrs)
    Covers definitions of the trigonometric functions, construction and use of trigonometric tables, solutions of right triangle problems, and applications of trigonometry to practical shop problems. South Campus.

    Pre & Co Requisite(s): Prerequisite: ATAM-1170 or consent of apprenticeship coordinator or related work experience
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, the learner will be able to describe the three trigonometric functions.

    Objectives:

    1. Using the sine ratio, solve simple right triangle problems with 80% accuracy.
    2. Using the cosine ratio, solve simple right triangle problems with 80% accuracy.
    3. Using the tangent ratio, solve simple right triangle problems with 80% accuracy.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, the learner will be able to describe the trigonometric ratios for mechanical problem applications.

    Objectives:

    1. Using applied mechanical geometric problems with the three trigonometric ratios, solve for unknown angles of right triangles with 80% accuracy.
    2. Using applied mechanical geometric problems with the three trigonometric ratios, solve for unknown lengths of sides of right triangles with 80% accuracy.
    3. Using applied mechanical geometric problems with the three trigonometric ratios, solve for lengths, widths and thickness of components with 80% accuracy.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, the learner will be able to define component geometry applications using the three trigonometric ratios.

    Objectives:

    1. Using applied mechanical geometric problems with the three trigonometric ratios, solve for distances between features of size with 80% accuracy.
    2. Using applied mechanical geometric problems with the three trigonometric ratios, solve for angles in circular geometry with 80% accuracy.
    3. Using applied mechanical geometric problems with the three trigonometric ratios, solve for distances between features with 80% accuracy.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Introduction and Orientation to the course. Define 3 trigonometry ratios; review of problem set-up format. Finding unknown sides of right triangles.
    2. Finding unknown sides of right triangles.
    3. Finding the angle when two sides of a right tangle are known. Use set-up format.
    4. Solution of practical right triangle problems. Use set-up format.

    Primary Faculty
    Gordon, Victoria
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Pawlowski, Timothy



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ATAM 2350 - Mathematics - A.C. Circuitry - Trigonometry & Vectors


    Credits: 2.00
    (2 contact hrs)
    Angles, angular measure (degrees, radians), angular velocity frequency, similar triangles, trig functions, solutions of right triangles, law of cosines, vector addition and subtraction, vector components, and graphing trig functions. South Campus.

    Pre & Co Requisite(s): Prerequisite: ATAM-1360 or consent of apprenticeship coordinator or related work experience
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to calculate trigonometry and vector problems for AC circuitry.

    Objectives:

    1. Utilize a calculator to solve polar and rectangular vectors.
    2. Utilize a calculator to solve right triangle problems.
    3. Calculate trigonometry and vector problems for AC circuitry.
    4. Solve triangular problems using the laws of sines and cosines.
    5. Use vector addition and subtraction to solve electrical problems.
    6. Solve angular velocity frequency problems.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Pre-Test 2. Post-Test1. Law of Sines
    2. Law of Cosines
    3. A.C. Fundamentals
    4. Phasor Algebra
    5. A.C. Series Circuits
    6. A.C. Parallel Circuits
    7. Equivalent Wye and Delta Circuits

    Primary Faculty
    Gordon, Victoria
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Pawlowski, Timothy



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088


Advanced Processes

  
  • ATAP 1030 - Feeds, Speeds, & Advanced Tools


    Credits: 2.00
    (2 contact hrs)
    This course teaches the student advanced cutting tool technologies, such as proper selection of tools for CNC mills and lathes, optimum feedrate, spindle speed, surface feet per minute calculations, maximum depth of cut, side steps, high speed machining, and hard milling and turning. The student will learn the importance of tool geometries. South Campus.

    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to select mill and lathe tools for CNC high speed machining.

    Objectives:

    1. Utilize rake geometry (positive and negative) for proper cutting methods.
    2. Know which tools to select for rough and finish machining operations.
    3. Know the proper use and difference between climb and conventional milling.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will know how to select proper tools and cutting grades for CNC high speed machining.

    Objectives:

    1. Select proper carbide grades.
    2. Know how to use indexable and solid cutting tools.
    3. Select tools based on workpiece materials types.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be know how to calculate federate, spindle speed, horsepower, and torque calculations for CNC high speed machining.

    Objectives:

    1. Calculate surface feet per minute.
    2. Calculate spindle speed calculations.
    3. Calculate federate calculations.
    4. Calculate radial chip thinning.
    5. Calculate horsepower calculations.
    6. Calculate torque calculations.
    7. Calculate chip load.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Tool Geometry
    2. Components of High Speed Machining
    3. Feed, Speed, Torque Calculations
    4. Tool Material Selection
    5. Advanced Mill Tool Geometry
    6. Advanced Turning Tool Geometry

    Primary Faculty
    Walters, Gary
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Pawlowski, Timothy



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ATAP 1050 - CNC Essentials


    Credits: 3.00
    (4 contact hrs)
    (formerly ATAP-2912) This lecture and lab course covers shop floor and CNC essentials necessary to subsist in today’s digital manufacturing setting. Students will employ MS Windows with advanced manufacturing and CNC applications. Topics include file creation, file management, spreadsheets for setup and tooling sheets, operation of all CNC controls in the lab, including mill, lathe, RAM, and Wire and Fast Hole EDM; basic metrology, such as micrometers and calipers; and basic inspection procedures using the Faro Gage. This course prepares students for all ATAP coursework. South Campus.

    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course the student will be able to perform basic computer functions using PC Windows.

    Objectives:

    1. Turn on a PC and navigate Windows.
    2. Perform basic file management functions, such as create, rename, and move filenames and folders, move and copy files from drive to drive, including use of external drives, such as memory sticks.
    3. Email files to the instructor and open emails from the instructor.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course the student will be able to identify the fundamentals of Computer Numeric Control.

    Objectives:

    1. The student will apply CNC mills, lathes, Electrical Discharge Machines, lasers, and waterjet machines in industry with 80% accuracy.
    2. Given a part print, the student will map coordinates onto the Cartesian coordinate system with 80% accuracy.
    3. Given previously developed CNC programs, the student will read and interpret CNC mill, lathe, and RAM EDM programs with 80% accuracy.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course the student will be able to apply the proper cutting tool technology to CNC applications.

    Objectives:

    1. Given a manufacturing application, the student will identify basic and advanced cutting tools used in CNC applications with 80% accuracy.
    2. Given a cart of CNC tool holders, the student will identify basic tool holders used in CNC mill and lathe applications.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course the student will be able to operate all CNC controls in the lab, including mill and lathe.

    Objecives:

    1. Given a variety of CNC mills, lathes, and A. Given a variety of CNC mills, lathes, and EDM machines, the student will power up and power down each machine with 80% accuracy.
    2. Given a variety of CNC mills, lathes, and EDM machines, the student will upload and download files to and from CNC controls using a floppy, memory stick and RS232 connections with 80% accuracy.
    3. Given a variety of CNC mills, lathes, and EDM machines, the student will simulate programs with 80% accuracy.
    4. Given a variety of CNC mills, lathes, and EDM machines, the student will load and unload tools into the magazine pouches and turrets.

    Outcome 5: Upon completion of this course the student will be able to measure parts using precision measuring equipment.

    Objectives:

    1. Given an inch and metric micrometer, the student will measure with 80% accuracy.
    2. Given a dial caliper, the student will measure with 80% accuracy.
    3. Given a Faro Gage or equivalent, the student will measure and record part dimensions with 80% accuracy.
    4. Given a Faro Gage, the student will inspect parts with 80% accuracy.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Computer functions
      1. Power on and navigate PC Windows
      2. File management
      3. Upload to and from CNC control panels
      4. Email
    2. Computer Numeric Control applications
      1. Overview of CNC mills, lathes, Electrical Discharge Machines, lasers, and waterjet machines
      2. Cartesian coordinate system
      3. Introduction to CNC programming
    3. Advanced cutting tool technology
      1. Identification of cutting tools
      2. CNC mill, lathe, and EDM tool holders
    4. CNC operation
      1. CNC Mill, Lathe, RAM, Wire, and Fast Hole
      2. Upload and download files
      3. Simulate programs
      4. Load and unload tools
    5. Basic measuring tools
      1. Inch and metric micrometers
      2. Dial calipers

    Primary Faculty
    Walters, Gary
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Pawlowski, Timothy



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ATAP 2010 - Drafting - 2D CAD with MasterCAM


    Credits: 2.00
    (2 contact hrs)
    This course teaches the general concepts of two dimensional modeling and drafting using MasterCAM. Through lecture and lab assignments, the student will learn basic two-dimensional modeling skills. Beginning with 2D wireframe construction, students will learn the interface and how to design basic models. These models are then used to create drawings, complete with dimensions and annotations. Terminology used in the field of CAD will be emphasized. South Campus.

    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to navigate through the user interface.

    Objectives:

    1. Zoom, pan, and rotate.
    2. Manipulate pulldown menus and icons.
    3. Import and Export various file types.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to construct two-dimensional geometry from prints and theories of geometry.

    Objectives:

    1. Create points, lines, arcs, and splines.
    2. Create tangent curves.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to organize geometry.

    Objectives:

    1. Move geometry to levels.
    2. Modify entity attributes (color, line weight, and line style).

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to modify geometry.

    Objectives:

    1. Trim geometry.
    2. Break geometry.
    3. Delete entities.

    Outcome 5: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to transform geometry.

    Objectives:

    1. Move and copy entities.
    2. Rotate entities

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. CAD Interface and Basic Layout
    2. Visualization, Zoom, Pan, and Rotate Shaded Models
    3. 2D Design Concepts
    4. Edit Geometry
    5. Basic Drawing Layout using the Drafting Module

    Primary Faculty
    Walters, Gary
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Pawlowski, Timothy



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ATAP 2020 - Art-To-Part - Digital Art to 3D CNC Machining


    Credits: 2.00
    (2 contact hrs)
    This course teaches the general concepts of Art-to-Part using ArtCAM software. Through lecture and lab assignments, the student will learn basic skills necessary to convert two-dimensional digital pictures into three-dimensional CAD data for surface machining. Toolpaths will be generated and parts will be machined using CNC Machine Tools. Terminology used in the field of CAD/CAM will be emphasized. South Campus.

    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to navigate through the user interface.

    Objectives:

    1. Zoom, pan, rotate, and shade.
    2. Manipulate the pulldown menus and icons.
    3. Organize CAD entities by layers.
    4. Import and export various file types.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to convert artwork into digital format.

    Objectives:

    1. Understand digital formats.
    2. Scan hardcopy drawings and photos into digital format.
    3. Download picture files from internet.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to create clean vector data for machining and relief creation.

    Objectives:

    1. Create lines, arcs, splines, and polygonal shapes.
    2. Edit and manipulate vectors.
    3. Convert pixel data to vectors.
    4. Create text data.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to create and modify relief (tessellated surfaces) from vectors.

    Objectives:

    1. Utilize the shape editor to extrude vectors.
    2. Create surfaces using sweep command.
    3. Smooth surfaces using texturing tools
    4. Offset surfaces to create molds.
    5. Add special textures to surfaces.
    6. Wrap surfaces onto geometric shapes.

    Outcome 5: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to program toolpaths for CNC machining.

    Objectives:

    1. Create 2D profiles and pocket operations.
    2. Create rough and finish surface machining operations.
    3. Post process toolpath data to CNC machines.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. CAD Interface and Basic Layout
    2. Visualization, Zoom, Pan, and Rotate shaded models
    3. Design Concepts
    4. Convert general 2D digital pictures to 3D CAD data
    5. Convert digital photos of human faces into 3D CAD data
    6. Create and edit surface data
    7. Create and edit text (fonts)
    8. “Wrap” two dimensional data around a cylindrical surface
    9. Basic Drawing layout using the Drafting Module
    10. CAM Interface and Basic Layout
    11. Basic CNC 3D Toolpath Creation, including rough and finish surface machining
    12. Toolpath Simulation and Verification
    13. Toolpath Post Processing
    14. 14. CNC Machining in the lab

    Primary Faculty
    Walters, Gary
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Pawlowski, Timothy



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ATAP 2030 - 2D MasterCAM - Mill Programming & Machining


    Credits: 2.00
    (2 contact hrs)
    This course teaches the general concepts of MasterCAM for milling. Through lecture and lab assignments, the student will learn basic two-dimensional toolpath skills. Beginning with 2D wireframe construction, students will learn the interface and how to design basic models. These models are then used to create drawings and 2D CNC mill toolpaths using the CAM module. Terminology used in the field of CAD/CAM will be emphasized. South Campus.

    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to navigate through the MasterCAM user interface.

    Objectives:

    1. Zoom, pan, rotate, and shade.
    2. Manipulate the pulldown menus and icons.
    3. Organize CAD entities by layers.
    4. Import and export various file types.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to create two dimensional toolpath operations.

    Objectives:

    1. Define drilling operations.
    2. Define profiling operations.
    3. Define pocketing operations.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to edit toolpath operations.

    Objectives:

    1. Modify cutting parameters.
    2. Modify geometric chains.
    3. Modify tool conditions.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to post-process toolpath operations to CNC machines.

    Objectives:

    1. Setup post-processing conditions.
    2. Check post processed file for accuracy.

    Outcome 5: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to simulate toolpath operations for final verification.

    Objectives:

    1. Backplot toolpath operations.
    2. Compare toolpath operations to CAD model.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. CAD Interface and Basic Layout
    2. Visualization, Zoom, Pan, and Rotate shaded models
    3. Design Concepts
    4. Basic Drawing layout using the Drafting Module
    5. CAM Interface and Basic Layout
    6. Basic CNC 2D Toolpath Creation, including profile, drill, and pocket
    7. Toolpath Simulation and Verification
    8. Toolpath Post Processing
    9. CNC Machining in the lab

    Primary Faculty
    Walters, Gary
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Pawlowski, Timothy



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ATAP 2310 - CNC Mill G & M Programming & CNC Machining


    Credits: 2.00
    (2 contact hrs)
    This course teaches the general concepts of CNC Mill Programming. Through lecture and lab assignments, the student will learn offline programming, shop floor programming, and the principles of 2-1/2 axis CNC milling. Profiling, facing, drilling, reaming, tapping, threading and pocketing cycles will be emphasized, accompanied by demonstrations, student programming, and hands-on setup and machine operation. South Campus.

    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to program and debug two-dimensional CNC mill toolpath operations using Fanuc compatible G&M code programming language.

    Objectives:

    1. Program drilling operations.
    2. Program rough and finish profile operations.
    3. Utilize absolute and incremental style programming.
    4. Program subroutines and subprograms.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to program tool offsets.

    Objectives:

    1. Define tool length offsets.
    2. Define cutter diameter compensation.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to verify toolpath programs prior to machining.

    Objectives:

    1. Simulate programs on the machine controller.
    2. Simulate programs using stand-alone simulators.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to operate CNC milling machine tools.

    Objectives:

    1. Upload CNC programs.
    2. Setup tool length and cutter diameter compensation offsets.
    3. Setup fixture offsets.
    4. Run programs.
    5. Edit, debug, and rerun programs.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. CNC Mill Control Units
      1. Discuss the following topics
        1. Memory Management
        2. Program Management
    2. Applied Operation of the following topics:
      1. Editing
      2. Program Saving
      3. Program Deletion
      4. Program Run
      5. Tool Offsetting
      6. Uploading Procedures
      7. Downloading Procedures
    3. CNC Mill Programming
      1. The Cartesian coordinate system
        1. As used to relate the Machine to the Part
        2. As used to relate the Cutting Tool to the Part generated by the program
      2. Manual Programming
        1. M & G Code Formats using ISO Programming
        2. Incremental Positioning
        3. Absolute Positioning
        4. Specific Control Formats
        5. Cutting Tool Compensation
      3. Advance Techniques
        1. Sub-programs
        2. Coordinate system rotation
        3. Mirroring
        4. Datum offsets
        5. Multiple Part Programming
        6. Incremental repeat programming
    4. CNC Mill Operation
      1. Mill Start up and Grid Procedures
      2. Program Run Procedures
      3. Basic Mill Set-Up Procedures
      4. Tool Changing Procedures
      5. Setting Tool Length Offsets

    Primary Faculty
    Walters, Gary
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Pawlowski, Timothy



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ATAP 2320 - CNC Lathe G & M Programming & CNC Machining


    Credits: 2.00
    (2 contact hrs)
    This course teaches the general concepts of CNC Lathe Programming and Machining. Through lecture and lab assignments, the student will learn offline programming, shop floor programming, and the principles of 2 axis CNC turning. Turning, facing, drilling, reaming, tapping, and threading will be emphasized, accompanied by demonstrations, student programming, and hands-on setup and machine operation. South Campus.

    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to program and debug CNC lathe toolpath operations using Fanuc compatible G&M code programming language.

    Objectives:

    1. Program rough and finish facing operations.
    2. Program rough and finish OD profile operations.
    3. Program OD threading operations.
    4. Utilize absolute and incremental style programming.
    5. Program subroutines and subprograms.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to program tool offsets.

    Objectives:

    1. Define tool length offsets.
    2. Define cutter diameter compensation.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to verify toolpath programs prior to machining.

    Objectives:

    1. Simulate programs on the machine controller.
    2. Simulate programs using stand-alone simulators.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to operate CNC milling machine tools.

    Objectives:

    1. Upload CNC programs.
    2. Setup tool length and cutter diameter compensation offsets.
    3. Setup fixture offsets.
    4. Run programs.
    5. Edit, debug, and rerun programs

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. CNC Lathe Control Units
      1. Discuss the following topics
        1. Memory Management
        2. Program Management
    2. Applied Operation of the following topics
      1. Editing
      2. Program Saving
      3. Program Deletion
      4. Program Run
      5. Tool Offsetting
      6. Uploading Procedures
      7. Downloading Procedures
    3. CNC Lathe Programming
      1. The Cartesian coordinate system
        1. As used to relate the Machine to the Part
        2. As used to relate the Cutting Tool to the Part generated by the program
      2. Manual Programming
        1. M & G Code Formats using ISO Programming
        2. Incremental Positioning
        3. Absolute Positioning
        4. Specific Control Formats
        5. Cutting Tool Compensation
      3. Advance Techniques
        1. Sub-programs
        2. Datum offsets
        3. Incremental repeat programming
    4. CNC Lathe Operation
      1. Lathe Start up and Grid Procedures
      2. Program Run Procedures
      3. Basic Lathe Set-Up Procedures
      4. Tool Changing Procedures
      5. Setting Tool Length Offsets

    Primary Faculty
    Walters, Gary
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Pawlowski, Timothy



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ATAP 2330 - EDM RAM - G & M Programming & Machining


    Credits: 2.00
    (2 contact hrs)
    This course teaches the general concepts of RAM Electrical Discharge Machining, a method involving electrical discharges between an electrode and a conductive workpiece to remove material in a non-conventional manner. Through lecture and lab assignments, the student will learn multiple EDM skills, beginning with an overview of EDM technology, followed by electrode material selection, proper design of electrodes, spark gap theory, and the principles of 2D and 3D electrode orbiting. Terminology used in the field of RAM, Wire, and Fast Hole EDM will be emphasized, accompanied by demonstrations, student programming, and EDM setup and operation. South Campus.

    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to identify RAM EDM burn areas.

    Objectives:

    1. Sharpen corners previously left round from milling operations.
    2. Burn deep areas that conventional machining methods cannot perform.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to design RAM EDM electrodes.

    Objectives:

    1. Select proper grade of graphite.
    2. Use existing CAD surfaces.
    3. Extend electrode surfaces for clearance.
    4. List burn locations for RAM EDM operation.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to machine RAM EDM electrodes.

    Objectives:

    1. Create and run CNC programs.
    2. Drill holes for flush.
    3. Mount in holders.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to program RAM EDM machines.

    Objectives:

    1. Define proper power settings.
    2. Determine proper spark gap size.
    3. Compare negative and positive polarity settings.
    4. Design for speed, wear, or finish requirements.
    5. Program burn locations.

    Outcome 5: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to setup and operate RAM EDM machines.

    Objectives:

    1. Setu workpiece.
    2. Define X0 Y0 Z0.
    3. Dry run programs.
    4. Execute live programs.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. EDM Overview
      1. History
      2. RAM EDM
      3. Spark Gap Theory
    2. RAM EDM Setup and Operation
      1. EDM Startup and Grid Procedures
      2. Mounting an electrode into a RAM EDM
      3. Setting work zero
    3. CNC RAM EDM Operation
      1. Start up and Grid Procedures
      2. Program Run Procedures
      3. Basic Set-Up Procedures
    4. Manual Programming
      1. G & M code programming

    Primary Faculty
    Walters, Gary
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Pawlowski, Timothy



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ATAP 2340 - EDM WIRE - G & M Programming & Machining


    Credits: 2.00
    (2 contact hrs)
    This course teaches the general concepts of Wire Electrical Discharge Machining, a method involving electrical discharges between a wire and a conductive workpiece to remove material in a non-conventional manner. Through lecture and lab assignments, the student will learn multiple EDM skills, beginning with an overview of Wire EDM technology, followed by wire selection, spark gap theory, and the principles of rough cuts and skim passes. Terminology used in the field of Wire EDM will be emphasized, accompanied by demonstrations, student programming, and EDM setup and operation. South Campus.

    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to identify areas to wire EDM.

    Objectives:

    1. Follow CAD contours.
    2. Wire through hole locations.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to program Wire EDM machines.

    Objectives:

    1. Define proper grade of wire.
    2. Define power settings.
    3. Determine proper spark gap size.
    4. Design for Speed, wear, or finish requirements.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to setup and operate Wire EDM machines.

    Objectives:

    1. Setup workpiece.
    2. Define X0 Y0 Z0
    3. Execute live programs.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Wire EDM Overview
      1. History
      2. Wire EDM
      3. Spark Gap Theory
    2. Wire EDM Setup and Operation
      1. Wire EDM Startup and Grid Procedures
      2. Threading the wire into a Wire EDM
      3. Setting work zero
    3. Wire EDM Operation
      1. Wire EDM Start up and Grid Procedures
      2. Program Run Procedures
      3. Basic Wire EDM Set-Up Procedures
    4. Manual Programming and CAM
      1. G & M code programming
      2. CAM programming

    Primary Faculty
    Walters, Gary
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Pawlowski, Timothy



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ATAP 2350 - 3D MasterCAM - Die/Mold CNC Machining


    Credits: 2.00
    (2 contact hrs)
    This course teaches the advanced concepts of MasterCAM milling. Through lecture and lab assignments, the student will learn advanced CAD/CAM modeling skills. Students will design 3D models. These models are then used to create CNC 3D toolpaths using the CAM module. Terminology used in the field of CAD/CAM will be emphasized. South Campus.

    Pre & Co Requisite(s): Prerequisite: ATAP-2030
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to navigate through the MasterCAM user interface.

    Objectives:

    1. Zoom, pan, rotate, and shade.
    2. Manipulate the pull down menus and icons.
    3. Organize CAD entities by layers.
    4. Import and export various file types.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to create three-dimensional geometry.

    Objectives:

    1. Define 3D surface geometry.
    2. Define 3D solid model geometry.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to create three dimensional toolpath operations.

    Objectives:

    1. Define rough machining operations.
    2. Define wide variety of finish machine operations.
    3. Define pencil-milling operations.
    4. Define remachine-milling operations.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to edit toolpath operations.

    Objectives:

    1. Modify cutting parameters.
    2. Modify geometric chains.
    3. Modify tool conditions.

    Outcome 5: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to post-process toolpath operations to CNC machines.

    Objectives:

    1. Setup post-processing conditions.
    2. Check post processed file for accuracy.

    Outcome 6: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to simulate toolpath operations for final verification.

    Objectives:

    1. Backplot toolpath operations.
    2. Compare toolpath operations to CAD model.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. CAD Interface and Basic Layout
    2. Visualization, Zoom, Pan, and Rotate shaded models
    3. Design Concepts
    4. Parametric design and constraints
    5. Solid Modeling
    6. Basic Drawing layout using the Drafting Module
    7. Exporting Data to CAM and other applications
    8. CAM Interface and Basic Layout
    9. Basic CNC 2D Toolpath Creation, including profile, drill, and pocket
    10. Basic CNC 3D Toolpath Creation, including rough and finish surface machining
    11. Toolpath Simulation and Verification
    12. Toolpath Post Processing
    13. CNC Machining in the lab

    Primary Faculty
    Walters, Gary
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Pawlowski, Timothy



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ATAP 2360 - 3D Cimatron CAD/CAM - Die/Mold Machining


    Credits: 2.00
    (2 contact hrs)
    This course teaches the general concepts of Cimatron CAD/CAM milling. Through lecture and lab assignments, the student will learn basic CAD/CAM modeling skills. Beginning with Solids, students will learn the interface and how to design basic models. These models are then used to create drawings and CNC toolpaths using the CAM module. Terminology used in the field of CAD/CAM will be emphasized. South Campus.

    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to navigate through the Cimatron user interface.

    Objectives:

    1. Zoom, pan, rotate, and shade.
    2. Manipulate the pulldown menus and icons.
    3. Organize CAD entities by sets.
    4. Import and export various file types.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to create 2D geometry using the sketcher.

    Objectives:

    1. Define points, lines, arcs, and rectangles.
    2. Import sketches from library.
    3. Edit sketches.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to create three-dimensional solid model geometry.

    Objectives:

    1. Add and remove extrusions to solid model.
    2. Create three-dimensional surfaces.
    3. Create text geometry.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to create two-dimensional toolpath operations.

    Objectives:

    1. Define profile-machining operations.
    2. Define pocket machine operations.
    3. Define tool library.

    Outcome 5: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to edit toolpath operations.

    Objectives:

    1. Modify cutting parameters.
    2. Modify geometric chains.
    3. Modify tool conditions.

    Outcome 6: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to postprocess toolpath operations to CNC machines.

    Objectives:

    1. Setup post-processing conditions.
    2. Check post processed file for accuracy.

    Outcome 7: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to simulate toolpath operations for final verification.

    Objectives:

    1. Simulate procedures in wireframe and shaded modes.
    2. Compare toolpath operations to CAD model.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. CAD Interface and Basic Layout
    2. Visualization, Zoom, Pan, and Rotate shaded models
    3. Design Concepts
    4. Parametric design and constraints
    5. Solid Modeling
    6. Basic Drawing layout using the Drafting Module
    7. Exporting Data to CAM and other applications
    8. CAM Interface and Basic Layout
    9. Basic CNC 2D Toolpath Creation, including profile, drill, and pocket
    10. Basic CNC 3D Toolpath Creation, including rough and finish surface machining
    11. Toolpath Simulation and Verification
    12. Toolpath Post Processing
    13. CNC Machining in the lab

    Primary Faculty
    Walters, Gary
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Pawlowski, Timothy



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ATAP 2370 - 3D Computer Aided Mold/Electrode Design


    Credits: 2.00
    (2 contact hrs)
    This course teaches the general concepts of electrode design and manufacture, along with mold (tool) design using Cimatron CAD/CAM software. Through lecture and lab assignments, the student will design electrodes for use in the Electrical Discharge Machining industry. The student will also learn how to design mold tooling and moldbases using Cimatron CAD/CAM. Terminology used in the field of Mold Design will be emphasized. South Campus.

    Pre & Co Requisite(s): Prerequisite: ATAP-2360
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to navigate through the Cimatron user interface.

    Objectives:

    1. Zoom, pan, rotate, and shade.
    2. Manipulate the pull down menus and icons.
    3. Organize CAD entities by sets.
    4. Import and export various file types.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to create advanced three-dimensional geometry.

    Objectives:

    1. Define 3D wireframe surfaces.
    2. Define sketches and 3D solid models.
    3. Define runoff surfaces used in the mold industry.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to design EDM electrodes from CAD model.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify EDM geometry.
    2. Define EDM parameters.
    3. Create drawings for each electrode.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to design mold tools using Cimatron functionality.

    Objectives:

    1. Design mold bases from libraries.
    2. Design tooling geometry.

    Outcome 5: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to define 3D toolpath operations for CNC machines.

    Objectives:

    1. Define rough machining procedures.
    2. Define finish machining procedures.

    Outcome 6: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to stimulate toolpath operations for final verification.

    Objectives:

    1. Simulate procedures in wireframe and shaded modes.
    2. Compare toolpath operations to CAD model.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Three dimensional surface modeling
    2. Three dimensional solid modeling
    3. Solid mold bases
    4. Electrode design and extraction
    5. 3D rough and finish toollpaths
    6. 3D toolpath simulation and verification

    Primary Faculty
    Walters, Gary
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Pawlowski, Timothy



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ATAP 2380 - Rapid Prototyping & Reverse Engineering


    Credits: 2.00
    (2 contact hrs)
    This course teaches the general concepts of Rapid Prototyping and Reverse Engineering. Through lecture and lab assignments, the student will learn basic skills necessary to convert CAD models into STL files and either CNC machine them or print them three dimensionally. Students will also be exposed to Reverse Engineering, which consists of three-dimensional scanning using a probe and laser, and an articulating arm. Terminology used in the field of Rapid Prototyping and Reverse Engineering will be emphasized. South Campus.

    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to use basic 3D CAD package to produce 3D surfaces and solid models.

    Objectives:

    1. Define 3D surfaces.
    2. Define 3D solid models.
    3. Export 3D geometry to STL format for rapid prototyping machines.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to identify STL format and structure.

    Objectives:

    1. Understand the mathematical makeup.
    2. Create ASCII and binary formats.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to identify various types of rapid prototyping machines.

    Objectives:

    1. Post process STL files for RP machines.
    2. Know the pros and cons of each machine type.
    3. Define each RP machine’s characteristics.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to rapid prototype using the following methods.

    Objectives:

    1. CNC renshape part masters and molds.
    2. Mix and pour silicon rubber molds over master parts.
    3. Mix and pour casting materials into properly prepared molds (plaster, plastic, soap, etc.).

    Outcome 5: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to reverse engineer parts and molds.

    Objectives:

    1. Capture 3D point clouds using touch probe technology.
    2. Capture 3D point clouds using laser technology.
    3. Capture 3D point clouds using articulating arm.
    4. Capture 2D data manually by tracing existing object.
    5. Setup part to be scanned properly.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. History and Overview of Rapid Prototyping
    2. General Usage of Rapid Prototyping
    3. Data Translations (Cad to Rapid)
    4. File Format (STL - Stereolithography)
    5. Operation of Rapid Prototyping Machine
    6. Exposure to CAD/CAM as it relates to RP
    7. History and Overview of Reverse Engineering
    8. General Usage of Reverse Engineering
    9. Input Data (Stream, Point clouds, etc.)
    10. General Operation of Reverse Engineering equipment (3D Scanners, Articulating Arms, and 3D Digital Cameras)
    11. Manipulation and Editing of STL data (triangulated meshes)

    Primary Faculty
    Walters, Gary
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Pawlowski, Timothy



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ATAP 2915 - Advanced CNC Mill G&M Code Programming & Machining


    Credits: 3.00
    (4 contact hrs)
    This course teaches advanced concepts for print reading, applied geometry and trigonometry, CNC Mill G&M code programming, machining center setup (fixture design & build, tool assembly), CNC milling, and final inspection. Through teamwork, students process jobs from start to finish while developing confidence and honing their skills. This course provides a hand-on opportunity for students to “apply” their knowledge and leadership skills in the field of CNC mill machining. South Campus.

    Pre & Co Requisite(s): Prerequisite: ATAP-2310
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: The student will apply their knowledge in Mill G&M code programming, machining center setup, CNC milling, and part inspection to produce one or more machined parts.

    Objective:

    1. Develop G&M code programs with little supervision
    2. Setup and machine parts on CNC Machining Centers
    3. Inspect parts using common inspection tools on a surface plate
    4. Develop a cost analysis

    Outcome 2: The student will apply advanced concepts for print reading and applied mathematics.

    Objective:

    1. Read and interpret blueprints
    2. Solve applied math problems required for G&M code programming using applied geometry and trigonometry

    Outcome 3: The student will develop a portfolio for job interviews.

    Objective:

    1. Meet with Career Services to develop a resume
    2. Organize particular assignments to align with student portfolio
    3. Include one physical CNC machined part
    4. Include accompanying process documentation
    5. Include additional sampling of drawings and renderings representative of their knowledge in the field
    6. Include summary of problems encountered during the machining of the part, accompanied by how they came to each resolution

    Outcome 4: Students will develop leadership skills.

    Objective:

    1. Work effectively on joint projects through teamwork
    2. Head projects from start to finish, including complete lineups

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Read and interpret inch and metric drawings
    2. Solve mathematical problems using applied geometry and trigonometry
    3. Develop process plans to include job flow, order of operations, cutting tool list, cycle times, and final cost analysis
    4. Select appropriate cutting tools, along with appropriate feed rates and spindle speeds
    5. Assemble cutting tools using CAT40 holders, retention knobs, and collets
    6. Setup machine tools (fixtures, work offsets, and tool heights)
    7. Develop structured and easy to read G&M code programs, including linear, circular, and helical interpolation, subroutines and sub programs, and macros
    8. Inspect machined parts on the surface plate
    9. Develop oral and written presentation skills
    10. Build a personal portfolio
    11. Lead projects through teamwork

    Primary Faculty
    Walters, Gary
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Pawlowski, Timothy



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088


Building Construction & Maintenance

  
  • ATBC 1100 - Blueprint & Math - Residential


    Credits: 2.00
    (2 contact hrs)
    A course designed to provide a means for the student to interpret prints of existing residences, and to relate construction problems with general mathematics; further, this course will expand to cover some specific items imposed by inspection authorities. Contains material that will help the student prepare to take the Michigan Residential Builders License Examination. South Campus.

    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to construct and solve math problems related to information needed for construction.

    Objectives:

    1. Given a picture of a standard rule, the student will read 3 marked dimensions, to an accuracy of 67%.
    2. Given 3 sets of fractional dimensions, the student will add these dimensions, to an accuracy of 67%.
    3. Given 3 sets of fractional dimensions, the student will subtract these dimensions, to an accuracy of 67%.
    4. Given 3 fractional dimensions in inches, the student will convert these dimensions to feet and inches, to an accuracy of 67%.
    5. Given 3 fractional dimensions in feet and inches, the student will convert these dimensions to inches, to an accuracy of 67%.
    6. Given the run and the rise, the student will calculate the length of the rafter using the Pythagorean Theorem, to an accuracy of 100%.
    7. Given the diameter and height, the student will calculate the volume of a cylinder, to an accuracy of 100%.
    8. Given the dimensions of a house, the student will calculate the floor area, to an accuracy of 100%.
    9. Given a lumber size and quantity, the student will calculate the board feet, to an accuracy of 100%.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to identify abbreviations and symbols used on construction working drawings.

    Objectives:

    1. Given a set of symbols, the student will identify wood siding, brick, glass, concrete, and insulation, to an accuracy of 70%.
    2. Given a set of symbols, the student will identify light fixtures, electrical plugs, plumbing fixtures, and kitchen appliances, to an accuracy of 70%.
    3. Given a set of pictures, the student will identify the footings, studs, headers, joists, and rafters, to an accuracy of 70%.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to apply the proper terminology in building construction.

    Objectives:

    1. Given a set of questions, the student will identify the cripple, collar beam, area way, batten, cant board, to an accuracy of 70%.
    2. Given a set of questions, the student will identify the gusset, hearth, grounds, dead load, fenestration, and frieze, to an accuracy of 70%.
    3. Given a set of questions, the student will identify the soffit, ridge, truss, mullion, pilaster, rake, and purlin, to an accuracy of 70%.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to interpret dimensions and dimension symbols on working drawings.

    Objectives:

    1. Given a set of working drawings, the student will identify the overall sizes of a house, to an accuracy of 100%.
    2. Given a set of working drawings, the student will identify the size and spacing of the ceiling joists, to an accuracy of 100%.
    3. Given a set of working drawings, the student will identify the types and sizes of the windows and doors, to an accuracy of 100%.
    4. Given a set of working drawings, the student will identify the slope of the roof areas, to an accuracy of 100%.

    Outcome 5: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to identify the construction components of a roof overhang detail.

    Objectives:

    1. Given the cross section of a roof overhang detail, the student will identify the rafter, fascia, soffit, vent, lookout, ceiling joist, and frieze board, to an accuracy of 70%.

    Outcome 6: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to describe a functional and safe fireplace with a chimney.

    Objectives:

    1. Given the cross section of a fireplace detail, the student will identify the smoke shelf, flue lining, mantle, damper, throat, combustion chamber, and hearth, to an accuracy of 70%.
    2. Given a fireplace opening size, the student will calculate the cross sectional area of the flue, to an accuracy of 100%.
    3. Given a fireplace opening size, the student will calculate the height and size of the hearth, to an accuracy of 100%.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    • 5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Introduction to the course reading scales and dimensions
    2. Review of Construction Math Meaning of Lines on Drawings
    3. Symbols used on working drawings abbreviations used on working drawings
    4. Plot plans foundation plans
    5. Floor plans
    6. Frame construction
    7. Elevations, windows and doors sections and details
    8. Fireplace, stairs and trim details
    9. Finish schedules interior elevations
    10. Electrical plans plumbing plans
    11. Roof framing (conventional)
    12. Roof Framing (Trusses)
    13. Heating and cooling plans
    14. Specifications

    Primary Faculty
    Grant, Janice
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Pawlowski, Timothy



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ATBC 1150 - Blueprint & Math - Commercial


    Credits: 2.00
    (2 contact hrs)
    Study of blueprints of commercial, industrial, or institutional structures. Special emphasis on interpretation of details as they relate to construction problems. South Campus.

    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to identify symbols used on working drawings related to commercial construction.

    Objectives:

    1. Given a typical set of commercial construction documents, the student will identify material symbols and partition symbols.
    2. Given a typical set of commercial construction documents, the student will identify electrical outlets and switch outlets.
    3. Given a typical set of commercial construction documents, the student will identify plumbing symbols.
    4. Given a typical set of commercial construction documents, the student will identify HVAC symbols.
    5. Given a typical set of commercial construction documents, the student will identify weld symbols.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to identify the structural members of steel-frame construction.

    Objectives:

    1. Given a typical set of commercial construction documents, the student will identify wide-flange beams.
    2. Given a typical set of commercial construction documents, the student will identify S-section beams.
    3. Given a typical set of commercial construction documents, the student will identify channels, angles, and tees.
    4. Given a typical set of commercial construction documents, the student will identify tube steel.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to identify the types of blocks used in masonry construction.

    Objectives:

    1. Given a typical set of commercial construction documents, the student will identify stretcher block.
    2. Given a typical set of commercial construction documents, the student will identify concrete masonry units.
    3. Given a typical set of commercial construction documents, the student will identify lintel blocks.
    4. Given a typical set of commercial construction documents, the student will identify bond beam blocks.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to identify different foundation support systems related to commercial construction.

    Objectives:

    1. Given drawings with text support, the student will identify footings.
    2. Given drawings with text support, the student will identify foundation walls.
    3. Given drawings with text support, the student will identify grade beams.
    4. Given drawings with text support, the student will identify piles and caissons.
    5. Given a drawing with text support, the student will identify a slab on grade.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Introduction to the course
    2. Architectural abbreviations, architectural calculations, formulas
    3. Section symbols and site plans
    4. Building foundations, reinforced - concrete construction
    5. Steel-frame construction and steel trusses
    6. Structural steel shop drawings
    7. Schedules Stairs and Elevators
    8. Masonry construction
    9. Pre-stressed concrete construction, pre-cast concrete construction, and lift-slab and tilt-up construction
    10. Fire protection and reading drawings for a steel-frame building
    11. Reading drawings for a reinforced concrete building
    12. Reading drawings for a commercial building

    Primary Faculty
    Grant, Janice
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Pawlowski, Timothy



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ATBC 1160 - Construction - Cost Estimating


    Credits: 2.00
    (2 contact hrs)
    A study of methods and procedures that are currently used to perform a construction estimate. Course includes examination of plans and specifications, outlining of material takeoff methods, and labor pricing schedules. South Campus.

    Pre & Co Requisite(s): Prerequisite: ATBC-1150 or ATBC-1100
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcomes: Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:

    Objectives:

    1. Determine costs involved in building site excavation.
    2. Estimate and compare the cost of various foundations.
    3. Determine the cost of a roof.
    4. Estimate cost of installing plumbing in a building.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Introduction to the Course
    2. Residential Square Foot Cost
    3. Site work / Site Construction
    4. Foundations / Concrete and Masonry
    5. Framing / Wood and Plastics
    6. Exterior Walls / Metal
    7. Roofing / Thermal and Moisture Protection
    8. Interiors / Doors and Windows
    9. Specialties / Specialties and Equipment
    10. Mechanical / Mechanical
    11. Electrical / Electrical
    12. Special Construction / Conveying Systems
    13. Reference Section

    Primary Faculty
    Grant, Janice
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Pawlowski, Timothy



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ATBC 1180 - Construction - Electrical Blueprint Reading (Residential)


    Credits: 2.00
    (2 contact hrs)
    The interpretation of residential plans, wiring diagrams, wiring systems, and specifications. The National Electric Code regulations that apply to each step of the installation are analyzed. South Campus.

    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
     Outcome 1:  Upon completion of this course, students will be able to identify electrical symbols and notations used on electrical drawings.

     Objectives: 

    1. Given a set of residential construction prints, the student will interpret the lines and symbols that refer to electrical installation.
    2. Given a set of residential construction prints, the student will interpret the descriptions and notations that refer to electrical installation.
    3. Given a set of installation drawings, the student will interpret the schematic wiring diagrams that refer to electrical power distribution.

     Outcome 2:  Upon completion of this course, students will be able to determine the proper conductor sizes for residential wiring installation.

     Objectives: 

    1. Given the current National Electrical Code, the student will explain the requirements for calculating branch circuit sizing and loading.
    2. Given the current National Electrical Code, the student will estimate the loads for the outlet of a circuit.
    3. Given the current National Electrical Code, the student will determine the demand factors for various appliances.
    4. Given a set of residential construction prints, the student will calculate the watt loss and the voltage drop in two-wire and threewire circuits.

     Outcome  3:  Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate proper wiring connections.

    Objectives:

    1. Given the text and the National Electrical Code, the student will identify the correct wiring connections for various switches.
    2. Given the text and the National Electrical Code, the student will identify grounded and ungrounded conductors.
    3. Given the text and the National Electrical Code, the student will explain how a wall box can be grounded.
    4. Given the text and the National Electrical Code, the student will identify the proper switch for a specific installation.
    5. Given the text and the National Electrical Code, the student will identify when GFCI protection is required.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Introduction, Codes & Standards / Electrical Symbols
    2. Small Appliance Circuits / Conductors
    3. Switching and GFI’s
    4. Fixtures and Bedroom
    5. Master Bedroom, Bathroom and Halls
    6. Entry, Kitchen, Living Room
    7. Study and Bedroom
    8. Appliances, Garage, Rec. Room, Workshop
    9. Kitchen Appliances
    10. Heating and A/C
    11. Low Voltage Systems
    12. Fire Alarms etc.
    13. Services
    14. Services and Calc.

    Primary Faculty
    Gordon, Victoria
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Pawlowski, Timothy



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ATBC 1190 - Construction - Electrical Blueprint Reading (Commercial)


    Credits: 2.00
    (2 contact hrs)
    The interpretation of plans for commercial type buildings in regards to the electrical installation involved. NEC requirements that pertain to commercial installations are analyzed. South Campus.

    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:

    Objectives:

    1. Determine the size and location of the electrical entrance service for an instructor provided plan of a commercial building to an accuracy of 70%.
    2. Calculate the electrical branch circuit requirements for an instructor provided plan of a commercial building to an accuracy of 70%.
    3. Identify and list the electrical equipment components and lighting components shown on a plan of a bakery to an accuracy of 70%.
    4. Locate, identify and list the electrical equipment components and lighting components shown on a plan of a beauty salon to an accuracy of 70%.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Class Organization and Introduction Grade Criteria and Methods Examination of Plans and Specifications
    2. Commercial Building Plans and Specifications Reading Electrical and Architectural Drawings
    3. Branch Circuits and Feeders Reading Electrical Drawings - Bakery
    4. Switches and Receptacles
    5. Branch Circuits (Bakery)
    6. Appliance Circuits (Bakery) Reading Electrical Drawings (Insurance Office)
    7. Special Systems Reading Electrical Drawings (Beauty Salon)
    8. Special Circuits (Owner’s Circuits) Panelboard Selection and Installation The Electric Service
    9. Lamps for Lighting Luminaries
    10. Emergency Power Systems Overcurrent Protection Fuses and Circuit Breakers
    11. Short Circuit Calculations & Coordination of Overcurrent Protective Devices
    12. Equipment & Conductor Short Circuit Protection
    13. The Cooling System
    14. Review of Course

    Primary Faculty
    Gordon, Victoria
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Pawlowski, Timothy



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ATBC 1250 - Construction - Wiring Residential


    Credits: 2.00
    (2 contact hrs)
    After a brief review of electrical fundamentals and Ohm’s law and its applications, this course covers basic code requirements, standard electrical symbols used on plans, and the installation of various types of wiring systems permitted by national and local codes. Latest methods for rewiring inadequate wiring systems are covered. Large appliance and service equipment installations are well stressed. South Campus.

    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:

    Objectives:

    1. Describe a complete electrical circuit and its major components to an accuracy of 100%.
    2. List and describe ten tools used in the electrical trades and describe the safe use of each to an accuracy of 70%.
    3. Describe the reason for the proper connections for an electrical grounding system.
    4. Describe four electrical power systems for where and how each is used in residential and light commercial systems.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Class Organization and Introduction
    2. Grade Criteria and Methods
    3. Examination of Plans and Specifications
    4. Electrical Energy Fundamentals
    5. Electrical Circuit Theory
    6. Electrical Circuit Components
    7. Tools for the Electrician
    8. Safety for Grounding Essentials
    9. Wiring Systems
    10. Boxes, Fittings, and Covers
    11. Installing Boxes and Conductors
    12. Device Wiring
    13. Planning Branch Circuits
    14. Reading Prints and Wiring Circuits
    15. The Service Entrance
    16. Appliance Wiring & Special Outlets
    17. Mobile Home Wiring
    18. Low-Voltage Circuits
    19. Electrical Remodeling
    20. Electrical Meters
    21. Electrical Troubleshooting
    22. Specialized Wiring / WB - 20
    23. Motors and Motor Circuit
    24. Swimming Pool Wiring

    Primary Faculty
    Gordon, Victoria
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Pawlowski, Timothy



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ATBC 1260 - Construction - Wiring Commercial & Industrial


    Credits: 2.00
    (2 contact hrs)
    The course covers special purpose commercial and industrial wiring problems, including a practical approach to wiring methods, lighting (design and maintenance) equipment, and other materials and components peculiar to modern application of the National Electrical Code (NEC). South Campus.

    Pre & Co Requisite(s): Prerequisite: ATBC-1250 or ELEC-1300
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    1. Given standard provided within the text, define the two types of electricity. Performance is satisfactory when the definition conforms to standards within the text.
    2. Using guidelines provided within the text, describe the ways in which electricity is generated. Performance is satisfactory when the description conforms to guidelines.
    3. Using guidelines provided within the text, describe how electrical power is distributed into service. Performance is satisfactory when the description conforms to guidelines.
    4. Using guidelines provided within the text, describe various standards that insure electrical safety. Performance is satisfactory when the description conforms to guidelines.
    5. Using guidelines provided within the text, list various tools and equipment used primarily for electrical work. Performance is satisfactory when the list conforms to guidelines.
    6. Using guidelines provided within the text, describe the use of special devices used only by industrial electricians. Performance is satisfactory when the description conforms to guidelines.
    7. Given standards provided within the text, describe the proper method of making splices. Performance is satisfactory when the description conforms to guidelines.
    8. Using guidelines provided within the text, list the different types of incandescent lamps. Performance is satisfactory when the list conforms to guidelines.
    9. Using guidelines provided within the text, describe the difference between a preheat and an instant start fluorescent lamp. Performance is satisfactory when the description conforms to guidelines.
    10. Given appropriate data, determine what agencies regulate wiring codes. Performance is satisfactory when determination conforms to accepted standards.
    11. Given appropriate data, determine what a hazardous condition is according to the NEC. Performance is satisfactory when determination conforms to accepted standards.
    12. Using guidelines provided within the text, describe the major components of a mechanical generator. Performance is satisfactory when the description conforms to the guidelines within the text.
    13. Using guidelines provided within the text, list three types of DC motors. Performance is satisfactory when the list conforms to guidelines.
    14. Using guidelines provided within the text, list three types of AC motors. Performance is satisfactory when the list conforms to guidelines.
    15. Given standards provided within the text, describe methods used to conserve electric energy. Performance is satisfactory when the description conforms to guidelines.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Class Organization and Introduction
    2. Grade Criteria and Methods
    3. Plans and Site Work
    4. The Unit Substation
    5. Feeder Bus System
    6. Panelboards
    7. Trolley Busways
    8. Using Wiring Tables
    9. Signaling Systems
    10. Motors and Controllers
    11. Motor Installation
    12. Special Equipment
    13. Ventilating, AC and Other Facilities
    14. System Protection
    15. Lightning Protection
    16. Site Lighting
    17. Hazardous Locations

    Primary Faculty
    Gordon, Victoria
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Pawlowski, Timothy



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088
  
  • ATBC 1400 - Construction - Hand Woodworking Tools - Care & Use


    Credits: 3.00
    (3 contact hrs)
    This course consists of the selection, safe use, and maintenance of hand woodworking tools used in the carpentry and building maintenance occupations. For example: framing square, sawing tools, planes, cutting edge tools, coring tools, smoothing tools, and layout tools. South Campus.

    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able identify various different measuring tools.

    Objectives:

    1. Given drawings with text support and the actual object, the student will identify spring-joint rules.
    2. Given drawings with text support and the actual object, the student will identify steel tapes.
    3. Given drawings with text support and the actual object, the student will identify pocket tape rules.
    4. Given drawings with text support and the actual object, the student will identify caliper rules.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able identify various layout tools.

    Objectives:

    1. Given a drawing with text support and the actual object, the student will identify the rafter and framing square.
    2. Given drawings with text support and the actual object, the student will identify wood marking gauges.
    3. Given drawings with text support and the actual object, the student will identify try and miter squares.
    4. Given a drawing with text support and the actual object, the student will identify the combination square.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able identify various testing tools.

    Objectives:

    1. Given drawings with text support and the actual object, the student will identify spirit levels.
    2. Given drawings with text support and the actual object, the student will identify line levels.
    3. Given drawings with text support and the actual object, the student will identify plumb bobs.
    4. Given drawings with text support and the actual object, the student will identify the builders level and the builders transit level.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able identify various sawing tools.

    Objectives:

    1. Given drawings with text support and the actual object, the student will identify the hand crosscut saw and the ripsaw.
    2. Given drawings with text support and the actual object, the student will identify compass and keyhole saw.
    3. Given a drawing with text support and the actual object, the student will identify coping saw.
    4. Given a drawing with text support and the actual object, the student will identify the backsaw.

    Outcome 5: Upon completion of this course, students will be able identify various bench planes.

    Objectives:

    1. Given a drawing with text support and the actual object, the student will identify the jointer plane.
    2. Given a drawing with text support and the actual object, the student will identify the fore plane.
    3. Given a drawing with text support and the actual object, the student will identify the jack plane.
    4. Given a drawing with text support and the actual object, the student will identify the smooth plane.
    5. Given a drawing with text support and the actual object, the student will identify the block plane.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Introductions and Announcements

    2. An Outline of Early American Hand tools

    3. Uses of Various Measuring Tools

    4. Performance and Use of Framing Square

    5. Layout Tools and Their Function

    6. Methods of Using Checking Equipment

    7. Description of Various Saws and Saw Operations

    8. How to Refit (Sharpen) Handsaws

    9. A Discussion of Bench Planes and Their Uses

    10. Special Planes and Their Applications

    11. Uses of Edge Cutting Tools

    12. Boring Tools - Regular and Special

    13. Nails and Their Values as Fasteners

    14. Screw Selection for a Specific Function - Related Screw Drivers


    Primary Faculty
    Grant, Janice
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Pawlowski, Timothy



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ATBC 2600 - Construction Law & Contract Administration


    Credits: 2.00
    (2 contact hrs)
    A study of contracts, the Michigan builder’s licensing statute, mechanic’s liens, real estate law, warranties, construction financing, and taxes designed to introduce the student to the areas of the law he should be familiar with in the construction industry. Contains material that will help student prepare to take the Michigan Residential Builders License Examination. South Campus.

    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to identify and answer typical questions as may be used on the State of Michigan Builders Licensing Exam.

    Objectives:

    A. Given an overview of Articles 1 through 6 of the Occupational Code Act 299, the student will answer questions as may be used on the builder’s exam.

    B. Given an overview of Article 24 of the Occupational Code Act 299, the student will answer questions as may be used on the builder’s exam.

    C. Given an overview of the Administrative Rules of the Occupational Code Act 299, the student will answer questions as may be used on the builder’s exam.

    D. Given an overview of the Michigan Construction Code, the student will answer questions as may be used on the builder’s exam.

    E. Given an overview of Marketing and Sales, the student will answer questions as may be used on the builder’s exam.

    F. Given an overview of the Michigan Construction Safety Standards, the student will answer questions as may be used on the builder’s exam.

    G. Given an overview of MIOSHA Safety Rules pertaining to personal protective equipment, scaffolds, fixed and portable ladders, aerial work platforms, guarding of walking and work areas, masonry wall bracing, excavation, trenching and shoring, lifting and digging equipment, Right to Know/Hazard communication, fall protection, electrical installation, tools, demolition, signals, signs, tags and barriers, the student will answer questions as may be used on the builder’s exam.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to identify the key elements of construction finances.

    Objectives:

    A. Given the appropriate current construction cost data and taking into consideration profit margins, supplier and sub contractor costs and scheduling, the student will estimate projects using estimating formulas and calculations.

    B. Given an overview of accounting principles, the student will review business plans, balance sheets, profit and loss statements and identify basic bookkeeping principles.

    C. Given the principles of risk management, the student will determine the various methods of collections used to satisfy a debt.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to identify the key elements of contracting entities and construction law.

    Objectives:

    A. Given an overview of business management, the student will identify various business organizations and management structures.

    B. Given principles of marketing and sales, the student will answer questions pertaining to marketing, licensure requirements and the responsibilities of a salesperson, and compliance requirements of the Home Solicitation Sales Act.

    C. Given an overview of liability, the student will answer questions pertaining to work related injuries and Workers Compensation.

    D. Given the Uniform Commercial Code (UCC), the student will identify the classification of contracts and the principle elements for a contract.


    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Course Introduction
    2. Jurisdiction and Filing Venue
    3. Elements of a Contract
    4. Agents
    5. Tort Law
    6. Debt Collection
    7. Balance Sheets, Profit and Loss Statements
    8. Job Estimates
    9. Michigan Construction Code
    10. Michigan Real Estate Law
    11. Occupational Code

    Primary Faculty
    Grant, Janice
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Pawlowski, Timothy



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088


Drafting

  
  • ATDD 1900 - Drafting - Machine Tool Blueprint Reading


    Credits: 2.00
    (2 contact hrs)
    This course is an introduction to blueprint reading. The focus is on the interpretation of the fundamental components of a working blueprint, including their various symbology and industrial specifications, as well as different types of working blueprints. The industrial structures and mechanical systems found on working blueprints are also major components of this course. South Campus.

    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon successful completion of this course, the student will be able to interpret the fundamental components of a working blueprint.

    Objectives: Upon successful completion of this course, the student will be able to:

    1. Identify the orthographic and isometric views found on a blueprint.
    2. Identify the types of section views and auxiliary views found on a blueprint.
    3. Explain the types of lines found on a blueprint.
    4. Explain the types of units of measure and dimensions found on a blueprint.
    5. Describe the title block and revision column found on a blueprint.

    Outcome 2: Upon successful completion of this course, the student will be able to interpret the various symbology and industrial specifications found on a working blueprint.

    Objectives: Upon successful completion of this course, the student will be able to:

    1. Explain the types of tolerances found on a blueprint.
    2. Explain the types of symbols found on a blueprint.
    3. Explain the types of surface finishes and steel specifications found on a blueprint.
    4. Identify the basic geometric dimensioning and tolerancing language found on a blueprint.

    Outcome 3: Upon successful completion of this course, the student will be able to interpret the various types of industrial structures and mechanical systems found on a working blueprint.

    Objectives: Upon successful completion of this course, the student will be able to:

    1. Describe the types of industrial castings and structural steel shapes found on a blueprint.
    2. Describe the types of weldments found on a blueprint.
    3. Identify the types of fastening systems found on a blueprint.
    4. Identify the types of assembly systems found on a blueprint.

    Outcome 4: Upon successful completion of this course, the student will be able to interpret different types of working blueprints.

    Objectives: Upon successful completion of this course, the student will be able to:

    1. Describe a detail drawing.
    2. Describe an assembly drawing
    3. Describe a bill of materials.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Orthographic and isometric views
    2. Section views and auxiliary views
    3. Line types
    4. Units of measure and dimensions
    5. Title block and revision column
    6. Tolerances
    7. Symbols
    8. Surface finishes and steel specifications
    9. Geometric dimensioning and tolerancing
    10. Industrial castings and structural steel shapes
    11. Weldments
    12. Fastening systems
    13. Assembly systems
    14. Detail drawings
    15. Assembly drawings
    16. Bills of materials

    Primary Faculty
    Walters, Gary
    Secondary Faculty
    Gordon, Victoria
    Associate Dean
    Pawlowski, Timothy



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ATDD 1920 - Drafting - Geometric Dimensioning & Tolerancing Fundamentals


    Credits: 2.00
    (2 contact hrs)
    The content for this course is based on the latest ANSI/ASME Y14.5 Dimensioning and Tolerancing Standard. An introduction to tolerancing, symbology, form controls, datum referencing, orientation controls, position controls, runout and profile controls, location of fixed and floating fasteners, position of coaxial features and position on non-cylindrical features. South Campus.

    Pre & Co Requisite(s): Prerequisite: ATDD-1900 or ATDD-1950
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, the learner will be able to describe Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing (GD&T) of engineering drawing symbols, dimensioning requirements, dimensioning applications and limits of size.

    Objectives:

    1. Using the material presented on GD&T, apply symbols to dimensioning requirements to engineering drawings with 80% accuracy.
    2. Using the material presented on GD&T, apply dimensioning applications and limits of size to engineering drawings with 80% accuracy.
    3. Using the material presented on GD&T, apply Form Tolerancing to engineering drawings with 80% accuracy.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, the learner will be able to describe Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing (GD&T) of engineering drawing Form Tolerancing, Datum’s, Orientation Tolerancing and Location Tolerancing.

    Objectives:

    1. Using the material presented on GD&T, apply Datum’s and Datum referencing to engineering drawings with 80% accuracy.
    2. Using the material presented on GD&T, apply Orientation Tolerancing to engineering drawings with 80% accuracy.
    3. Using the material presented on GD&T, apply Position Tolerancing to engineering drawings with 80% accuracy.
    4. Using the material presented on GD&T, apply Symmetry Tolerancing to engineering drawings with 80% accuracy.
    5. Using the material presented on GD&T, apply Concentricity Tolerancing to engineering drawings with 80% accuracy.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, the learner will be able to describe Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing (GD&T) of engineering Runout Tolerancing, Profile Tolerancing, practical applications and dimensional calculation methods.

    Objectives:

    1. Using the material presented on GD&T, apply Runout Tolerancing to engineering drawings with 80% accuracy.
    2. Using the material presented on GD&T, apply Profile Tolerancing to engineering drawings with 80% accuracy.
    3. Using the material presented on GD&T, apply dimensional measurement calculations to engineering drawings with 80% accuracy.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Introduction and Orientation to the Course Introduction to Dimensioning and Tolerancing
    2. Dimensioning and Tolerancing Symbols
    3. Dimensioning Requirements
    4. Dimensioning Applications and Limits of Size
    5. Form Tolerancing
    6. Datums and Datum References
    7. Orientation Tolerancing
    8. Position Tolerancing - Fundamentals
    9. Position Tolerancing - Expanded Principles, Symmetry and Text and Study Guide Review Questions
    10. Concentricity
    11. Runout Tolerancing
    12. Profile Tolerancing
    13. Tolerancing-Applications and Calculations Methods

    Primary Faculty
    Walters, Gary
    Secondary Faculty
    Gordon, Victoria
    Associate Dean
    Pawlowski, Timothy



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ATDD 1950 - Drafting - Essentials


    Credits: 2.00
    (2 contact hrs)
    Introduction to blueprint reading and drafting: class exercises in interpreting lines, view positions, conventions, and standards found on prints; use of drawing tools, simple geometric construction, fundamentals of orthographic projection, use of finish symbols, the application of scale and precision dimensioning and an introduction to metric dimensioning. South Campus.

    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, the learner will be able to describe the communication tools used in orthographic mechanical drafting.

    Objectives:

    1. Using the material presented on definitions and terms, define and apply the terms to orthographic mechanical drafting with 80% accuracy.
    2. Using the material presented on communication tools, apply correct lettering and alphabet of lines to communicate on orthographic mechanical drafting with 80% accuracy.
    3. Using the material presented on size description, dimension orthographic mechanical drawings with 80% accuracy.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, the learner will be able to provide shape description.

    Objectives:

    1. Using the material presented on shape description, draw free hand sketching of orthographic geometric objects with 80% accuracy.
    2. Using the material presented on shape description, draw shapes of normal, slant, receding and inclined surfaces on orthographic mechanical drawings with 80% accuracy.
    3. Using the material presented on shape description, draw shapes of cylinders and complex shapes on orthographic mechanical drawings with 80% accuracy.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, the learner will be able to provide size description.

    Objectives:

    1. Using the material presented on size description, apply size description to normal surfaces with English and Metric units on orthographic mechanical drawings with 80% accuracy.
    2. Using the material presented on size description, apply size description to incline, slant, receding and oblique surfaces with English and Metric units on orthographic mechanical drawings with 80% accuracy.
    3. Using the material presented on size description, apply size description with precision dimensions, classes of fits and allowances on orthographic mechanical drawings with 80% accuracy.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. The Industrial Language and Lettering
    2. Geometric Constructions
    3. Applications of Geometric Construction
    4. Shape Description (freehand sketching)
    5. Shape Description (normal surfaces)
    6. Shape Description (slant and oblique surfaces)
    7. Cylinders and Complex Shapes
    8. Size Description
    9. Dimensioning of Cylindrical Objects
    10. Shape & Size Description
    11. Dimensioning of Precision Measurements
    12. Metric System (SI) Units
    13. Fits and Allowances
    14. Blueprint Reading Worksheet

    Primary Faculty
    Walters, Gary
    Secondary Faculty
    Gordon, Victoria
    Associate Dean
    Pawlowski, Timothy



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ATDD 1960 - Drafting - Conventions & Symbols


    Credits: 2.00
    (2 contact hrs)
    Drawings to illustrate assembly and detail drawings, print identification, holes, sections, tapers, and casting. Practice in reading related shop prints, and metric dimensioning. South Campus.

    Pre & Co Requisite(s): Prerequisite: ATDD-1950
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, the learner will be able to describe engineering drawing working instructions for assembly drawings, detail drawings, and casting drawings.

    Objectives:

    1. Using the material presented on engineering assembly drawings, read and interpret working instructions for assembly drawings with 80% accuracy.
    2. Using the material presented on engineering detail drawings, read and interpret working instructions for detail drawings with 80% accuracy.
    3. Using the material presented on engineering casting drawings, read and interpret working instructions for casting drawings with 80% accuracy.
    4. Using the material presented on engineering drawing, draw 3rd angle orthographic projection the following with 80% accuracy:
      1. Drilled holes
      2. Counterbored holes
      3. Countersunk holes
      4. Reamed holes
      5. Bored holes
      6. Tapped holes
      7. Doweled holes
      8. Tapers
      9. Chamfers
      10. Relief’s and undercuts

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, the learner will be able to describe engineering drawing sectioning including, full sections, half sections, revolved sections, aligned sections, offset sections, removed sections, broken out sections, and partial sections.

    Objectives:

    1. Using the material presented on engineering drawing sectioning, draw 3rd angle orthographic projection of full and half sections with 80% accuracy
    2. Using the material presented on engineering drawing sectioning, draw 3rd angle orthographic projection of revolved sections, aligned sections and offset sections with 80% accuracy
    3. Using the material presented on engineering drawing sectioning, draw 3rd angle orthographic projection of removed sections, broken out sections and partial sections with 80% accuracy

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, the learner will be able to describe the process of reading and interpreting engineering drawings of assemblies, details and castings for manufacturing and assembly of components.

    Objectives:

    1. Using the material presented on engineering assembly drawings, read and interpret assembly drawings for shape, features of size, location dimensioning and tolerancing with 80% accuracy
    2. Using the material presented on engineering detail drawings, read and interpret detail drawings for shape, features of size, location dimensioning and tolerancing with 80% accuracy
    3. Using the material presented on engineering casting drawings, read and interpret casting drawings for shape, features of size, location dimensioning and tolerancing with 80% accuracy

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Working instructions
    2. Assembly drawings
    3. Drawings and dimensioning of holes
    4. Drawing and dimensions of tapped holes
    5. Manufacturing engineering prints with castings & surface intersection
    6. Casting drawings
    7. Full and half sections
    8. Revolving out of position and aligned sections
    9. Offset sections and sections through ribs
    10. Revolved and removed sections
    11. Broken-out enlarged and partial sections
    12. Print reading problems
    13. Tapers, chamfer, and relief or undercut
    14. Product engineering blueprints

    Primary Faculty
    Walters, Gary
    Secondary Faculty
    Gordon, Victoria
    Associate Dean
    Pawlowski, Timothy



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ATDD 1970 - Drafting - Three Dimensional Shape Interpretation


    Credits: 2.00
    (2 contact hrs)
    Pictorial drawing concentrating on the isometric and oblique methods. Practice in three-dimensional visualization interpretation of orthographic prints is stressed by modeling clay into forms related to prints that cover the fundamentals of shape interpretation. South Campus.

    Pre & Co Requisite(s): Prerequisite: ATDD-1950
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, the learner will be able to describe pictorial drawing of normal surfaces, inclined surfaces and oblique surfaces in three-dimensional oblique pictorial drawing.

    Objectives:

    1. Using the material presented on normal surfaces, draw normal surfaces in oblique pictorial with 80% accuracy.
    2. Using the material presented on inclined surfaces, draw inclined surfaces in oblique pictorial with 80% accuracy.
    3. Using the material presented on oblique surfaces, draw oblique surfaces in oblique pictorial with 80% accuracy.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, the learner will be able to describe pictorial drawing of normal surfaces, inclined surfaces and oblique surfaces in three-dimensional isometric pictorial drawing.

    Objectives:

    1. Using the material presented on normal surfaces, draw normal surfaces in isometric pictorial with 80% accuracy.
    2. Using the material presented on inclined surfaces, draw inclined surfaces in isometric pictorial with 80% accuracy.
    3. Using the material presented on oblique surfaces, draw oblique surfaces in isometric pictorial with 80% accuracy.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, the learner will be able to describe pictorial drawing of oblique and isometric curved surfaces, dimensioning of oblique and isometric drawings and sectioning of oblique and isometric drawings.

    Objectives:

    1. Using the material presented on curved surfaces, draw oblique and isometric curved surfaces with 80% accuracy.
    2. Using the material presented on dimensioning, dimension oblique and isometric drawings with 80% accuracy.
    3. Using the material presented on sectioning, section oblique and isometric drawings with 80% accuracy.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, the learner will be able to describe pictorial solid modeling with clay or cardboard of normal, inclined and oblique surfaces on solid three-dimensional models.

    Objectives:

    1. Using the material presented, clay or cardboard model normal surfaces on solid three dimensional models with 80% accuracy.
    2. Using the material presented, clay or cardboard model inclined surfaces on solid three-dimensional models with 80% accuracy.
    3. Using the material presented, clay or cardboard model oblique surfaces on solid three dimensional models with 80% accuracy.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    1.  The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Introduction to Pictorial Drawing
    2. Inclined Edges and Surfaces in Oblique Drawings
    3. Circles and Cylinders in Oblique Drawings
    4. Isometric Drawings
    5. Isometric Circles and Curves
    6. Dimensioning and Notes in Pictorial Drawings
    7. Sections in Pictorial
    8. Pictorial Final

    Primary Faculty
    Walters, Gary
    Secondary Faculty
    Gordon, Victoria
    Associate Dean
    Pawlowski, Timothy



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ATDD 1980 - Drafting - Advanced Drawing Techniques


    Credits: 2.00
    (2 contact hrs)
    Orthographic drawing of single and double auxiliaries, weldments, castings, and symmetrically opposite parts. The study and application of metrics, base line dimensioning and practice in reading related shop drawings. South Campus.

    Pre & Co Requisite(s): Prerequisite: ATDD-1960
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, the learner will be able to describe functional drawing of symmetrical opposites, first and third angle orthographic projection and read and interpret weldment drawings and symbols.

    Objectives:

    1. Using the material presented on symmetrical opposites, create functional drawings of symmetrical opposites with 80% accuracy.
    2. Using the material presented on first and third angle projection, differentiate and create functional drawings using first or third angle orthographic projection with 80% accuracy.
    3. Using the material presented on weldment drawings, read and interpret weldment drawings and welding symbols with 80% accuracy.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, the learner will be able to describe the functional drawing of first and second auxiliary views showing true shape and size of inclined and oblique surfaces.

    Objectives:

    1. Using the material presented on first auxiliary views, draw the true shape and size of inclined surfaces using the first auxiliary projection method with 80% accuracy.
    2. Using the material presented on second auxiliary views, draw true shape and size of oblique surfaces using the second auxiliary projection with 80% accuracy.
    3. Using the material presented on datum dimensioning, datum dimension first and second auxiliary view drawings with 80% accuracy.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, the learner will be able to describe the process of dimensional measurement over tooling pins and tooling plugs of inclined and oblique features and features of size. Describe the three-plane reference system and symbolization of engineering notations.

    Objectives:

    1. Using the material presented on tooling pins, calculate and measure inclined and oblique features and features of size dimensions over tooling pins with 80% accuracy.
    2. Using the material presented on tooling plugs, calculate and measure inclined and oblique features and features of size dimensions over tooling plugs with 80% accuracy.
    3. Using the material presented on cataloging systems, read and interpret cataloging systems for dimensional measurement of features and features of size and cataloging systems of standard industrial fasteners and components with 80% accuracy.
    4. Using the material presented on the three-plane reference system, draw the three-plane reference system with engineering notations and symbols used in engineering drawing and design with 80% accuracy.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    1. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Functional Drawing
    2. Symmetrical Opposites Metric, First and Third Angle Projection
    3. Weldments (Print Reading)
    4. Single Auxiliary Views
    5. Double Auxiliary Views
    6. Auxiliary Print Reading
    7. Measuring Over Plugs
    8. Cataloging
    9. Three Plane Reference Systems and Symbolization of Notes

    Primary Faculty
    Walters, Gary
    Secondary Faculty
    Gordon, Victoria
    Associate Dean
    Pawlowski, Timothy



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ATDD 2911 - Drafting - Fundamentals of Descriptive Geometry


    Credits: 2.00
    (2 contact hrs)
    This course uses practical application to solve engineering problems through the projection of three-dimensional figures onto a two-dimensional plane surface. Students will utilize orthographic techniques to yield solutions such as the true length of a line, end/point view of a line, true shape of a plane, and edge view of a plane.
    South Campus.

    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon successful completion of this course, the student will be able to project points and lines in the principle views using orthographic projection.

    Objectives: Upon successful completion of this course, the student will be able to:

    1. Develop reference planes.
    2. Project points, straight lines and curved lines in all principle views.
    3. Create intersecting and non-intersecting lines in all principle views.
    4. Construct points and lines in and on the plane in all principle views.

    Outcome 2: Upon successful completion of this course, the student will be able to develop necessary auxiliary views using orthographic projection.

    Objectives: Upon successful completion of this course, the student will be able to:

    1. Construct true length of an oblique line.
    2. Develop true view of an inclined plane.
    3. Construct true view and end view of an oblique line.
    4. Determine true view and true angles between planes.

    Outcome 3: Upon successful completion of this course, the student will be able to develop necessary orthographic views using rules of parallelism and perpendicularity to yield proper measurements.

    Objectives: Upon successful completion of this course, the student will be able to:

    1. Construct line parallel to a line.
    2. Construct plane parallel to plane.
    3. Construct and measure perpendicular lines.
    4. Determine shortest distance between point and a line.
    5. Determine visibility of lines and planes.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.

    5. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society


    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Basics of orthographic projection, descriptive geometry defined, reference planes, points
    2. Lines, True Length, Curved lines
    3. Intersecting & Non-intersecting lines
    4. Planes, True View, Inclined, Oblique
    5. Line In/On a Plane & Points In/On a Plane
    6. True Length of Oblique line/True View of an Inclined Plane
    7. Edge View of Inclined/Oblique plane
    8. Midterm
    9. Parallelism: Line Parallel to a Line/Plane, Plane Parallel to a Plane
    10. Perpendicularity: Construction, Line Perpendicular to a Plane, Shortest distance from Point to Plane
    11. Plane Perpendicular to a line, plane perpendicular to a plane
    12. Visibility
    13. True angle between oblique lines, end view of a line
    14. Distance between point & a line, two lines
    15. Angle between oblique planes/Line & a Plane
    16. Final Exam

    Primary Faculty
    Richter, Lisa
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Pawlowski, Timothy



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088


Electronic Technology

  
  • ELEC 1100 - Introduction to Electronics


    Credits: 3.00
    (4 contact hrs)
    (formerly EETE-1100) ELEC-1100 is designed for non-ELEC majors who lack a formal training experience in the following areas: series, parallel, series-parallel and basic A.C. circuits. Students will use basic algebra, scientific calculators and an electronic software program in this class. South Campus.

    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be familiar with electronic terminology and coding of components.

    Objectives:

    1. Explain the properties of a conductor, semiconductor, and insulator based on the Bohr model of an atom.
    2. Determine the color-coded value of a 5%, 10%, and 20% tolerance resistor, using the EIA color code.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to calculate voltage, currents and resistance for different circuits.

    Objectives:

    1. Demonstrate the use of a DVOM on the voltage, current and resistance ranges given the proper equipment and components.
    2. Calculate voltages, current, resistances and powers for a series circuit.
    3. Calculate voltage, currents, resistances and powers for a parallel circuit.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE

    Week Topic Assignment

    1. Introduction
      1. Read: Chapter 1
      2. Lecture: Chapter 1
      3. Homework: Multiple choice test from Chapter 1
      4. Lab: Experiment 3
    2. Selected topics from Chapter 2 and Experiment3
    3. Read: Chapter 3
      1. Lecture: Chapter 3
      2. Review: Homework from Chapter 1
      3. Homework: Multiple choice test from Chapter 3
      4. Lab: Experiment 3
    4. Electronics Workbench
    5. Read: Chapter 4
      1. Lecture: Chapter 4
      2. Review: Homework from Chapter 3
      3. Homework: None
      4. Lab: Experiment 4
    6. Read: Chapter 4
      1. Lecture: Chapter 4
      2. Homework: Worksheet
      3. Lab: Experiment 4
    7. Read: Chapter 4
      1. Lecture: Chapter 4
      2. Review: Homework from worksheet
      3. Homework: Multiple choice test questions and even problems from Chapter 4
      4. Lab: Experiment 5
    8. Read: None
      1. Lecture: None
      2. Homework: None
      3. Lab: Experiment 6
    9. Read: None
      1. Lecture: None
      2. Homework: None
      3. Lab: Experiment 7
      4. Exam 1
    10. Read: None
      1. Lecture: Soldering
      2. Homework: Soldering
      3. Lab: Soldering and Experiment 8
    11. Read: Chapter 5
      1. Lecture: Chapter 5
      2. Homework: Multiple choice test questions and even problems from Chapter 5
      3. Lab: Experiment 9
    12. Lecture: Alternating Current
      1. Review: Homework chapter 5
      2. Lab: Oscilloscope
    13. Lecture: Capacitors and Diodes
      1. Lab: Oscilloscope
    14. Lecture: Rectifier Circuits
      1. Lab: Rectifier Circuits
    15. Lecture: Review
      1. Lab: Rectifier Circuits
    16. Final Exam

    Primary Faculty
    Dulinski, Kenneth
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Hinrichsen, Timothy



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ELEC 1111 - Electrical Fundamentals for Non-Electrical Tradesmen


    Credits: 2.00
    (2 contact hrs)
    (formerly ATEE-1110) ELEC-1111 is designed for non-electrical apprentices. Topics include atomic structure; Ohm’s Law; series and parallel A.C. circuits; magnetism and induction; D.C. motors and generators; D.C. meters; A.C. fundamentals; capacitance; inductance; alternators; A.C. motors; A.C. meters. South Campus.

    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to describe the relationship between voltage, current and resistance.

    Objectives:

    1. Apply Ohm’s Law in calculating an unknown circuit quantity.
    2. Apply Watt’s Law in calculating circuit parameters.
    3. Identify a series and parallel circuit and calculate circuit parameters.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to explain the relationship between induction and magnetism.

    Objectives:

    1. State the laws of magnetic attraction and repulsion.
    2. Explain the factors determining the strength of an electromagnet.
    3. Identify the parts of an A.C. and D.C. motor.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to describe the operation of meters.

    Objectives:

    1. Utilize a volt meter.
    2. Determine the amount of amperage flowing in a circuit using an amp meter.
    3. Describe the function of a watt meter.
    4. Measure resistance using an ohm meter.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Learning/Applying Fundamentals
    2. Sources of Electricity
    3. Conductors and Insulators
    4. Resistors and Capacitors
    5. Ohm’s Law
    6. Series circuits
    7. Parallel circuits
    8. Series Parallel Circuits
    9. Meters
    10. AC Voltage
    11. Electromagnetic Induction
    12. Motors
    13. Relays and Switches

    Primary Faculty
    Dulinski, Kenneth
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Hinrichsen, Timothy



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ELEC 1161 - Electronic Technology 1


    Credits: 3.00
    (4 contact hrs)
    (formerly EETE-1160) This course is intended for those students seeking entry-level knowledge in electronic technology. This course will provide the student with theory and practical experimentation in the following areas as applied to D.C. circuits: Series, Parallel, and Series-Parallel circuits. Meters will be used to measure and evaluate signals and operating voltages. Identification of basic electronic components as they relate to actual and schematic symbols. Ohm’s Law, Watt’s Law, Kirchhoff’s Laws, and the Superposition Theorem will be employed. An electronic software program will be applied to various circuits in class. Scientific calculators and basic algebra will be used in class. South Campus.

    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to develop a series circuit using Electronic Workbench

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to solve for all unknown values given 5 different series circuits. Ohm’s, Watt’s and Kirchhoff’s voltage laws will be developed.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to develop a parallel circuit using Electronic Workbench.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to solve for all unknown values given 5 different parallel circuits. Ohm’s, Watt’s and Kirchhoff’s current laws will be used.

    Outcome 5: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to solve for all unknown values given 5 different series-parallel circuits. Ohm’s, Watt’s and Kirchhoff’s current and voltage laws will be used.

    Objectives:

    1. Components, Quantities and Units
      1. Recognize common electrical components and measuring instruments
      2. State basic electrical and magnetic quantities and units
      3. Use scientific notation to express quantities
      4. Use engineering notation and metric prefixes to express large and small quantities
      5. Convert from one metric prefixed unit to another
    2. Voltage, Current and Resistance
      1. Describe the basic structure of the atom
      2. Explain the concept of electrical charge
      3. Define voltage, current and resistance and explain their characteristics
      4. Describe a basic electrical circuit
      5. Make basic circuit measurements
      6. Recognize electrical hazards and practice proper safety procedures
    3. Ohm’s law, energy and power
      1. Explain Ohm’s law
      2. Use Ohm’s law to determine voltage, current, or resistance
      3. Define energy and power
      4. Calculate power in an electronic circuit
      5. Properly select resistors based on power rating
      6. Explain energy conversion and voltage drops
      7. Discuss power supplies and their characteristics
      8. Describe a basic approach to troubleshooting
    4. Series circuits
      1. Identify a series circuit
      2. Determine the current in a series circuit
      3. Determine total series resistance
      4. Apply ohm’s law to series circuits
      5. Determine the total effect of voltage sources in series
      6. Apply Kirchhoff’s voltage law
      7. Use a series circuit as a voltage divider
      8. Determine power in a series circuit
      9. Determine and identify ground in a series circuit
      10. Measure voltages relative to circuit ground
      11. Troubleshoot series circuits
    5. Parallel circuits
      1. Identify a parallel circuit
      2. Determine the voltage across each parallel branch
      3. Apply Kirchhoff’s current law
      4. Determine total parallel equivalent resistance
      5. Apply ohm’s law in a parallel circuit
      6. Use a parallel circuit as a current divider
      7. Determine power in a parallel circuit
      8. Troubleshoot parallel circuits
    6. Series-Parallel circuits
      1. Identify series-parallel relationships
      2. Analyze series-parallel circuits
      3. Analyze loaded voltage dividers
      4. Determine the loading effect of a voltmeter on a circuit
      5. Analyze a Wheatstone bridge circuit
      6. Apply superposition theorem to circuit analysis
      7. Troubleshoot series-parallel circuits

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Components, Quantities and Units
      1. Electrical components and measuring instruments
      2. Electrical and magnetic units
      3. Scientific notation
      4. Engineering notation and metric prefixes
      5. Metric unit conversions
    2. Voltage, Current and Resistance
      1. Atomic structure
      2. Electrical charge
      3. Voltage, current, and resistance
      4. Basic circuit measurements
      5. Electrical safety
    3. Ohm’s law, energy and power
      1. Ohm’s law
      2. Application of Ohm’s law
      3. Energy and power
      4. Power in electronic circuits
      5. The power rating of resistors
      6. Energy conversion and voltage drops across a resistor
      7. Power supplies
      8. Introduction to troubleshooting
    4. Series circuits
      1. Resistors in series
      2. Current in a series circuit
      3. Total series resistance
      4. Ohm’s law applied to series circuits
      5. Voltage sources in series
      6. Kirchhoff’s voltage law
      7. Voltage dividers
      8. Power in a series circuit
      9. Circuit ground
      10. Troubleshooting series circuits
    5. Parallel circuits
      1. Resistance and voltage in parallel circuits
      2. Kirchhoff’s current law
      3. Total parallel equivalent resistance
      4. Ohm’s law applied to parallel circuits
      5. Current dividers
      6. Power in parallel circuits
      7. Troubleshooting parallel circuits
    6. Series-Parallel circuits
      1. Identifying series-parallel relationships
      2. Analysis of series-parallel circuits
      3. Voltage dividers with resistive loads
      4. Loading effect of meters
      5. The Wheatstone Bridge
      6. Superposition theorem
      7. Troubleshooting series-parallel circuits

    Primary Faculty
    Dulinski, Kenneth
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Hinrichsen, Timothy



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ELEC 1171 - Electronic Technology 2


    Credits: 3.00
    (4 contact hrs)
    (formerly EETE-1170) This course is a continuation for students seeking entry-level knowledge in electronic technology. This course will provide theory and experimentation in the following areas as applied to A.C. circuits: alternators, sine waves, capacitance, inductance, RC, RL and RCL series and parallel circuits, phase shift and filter, phase lead and lag circuits. Experimentation will include the use of meters, the oscilloscope, and the function generator. South Campus.

    Pre & Co Requisite(s):  

    Prerequisite: ELEC-1161


    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to develop a series circuit using Electronic Workbench.

    Outcome 2:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to solve for all unknown values given 5 different series circuits. Ohm’s, Watt’s and Kirchhoff’s voltage laws will be developed.

    Outcome 3:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to develop a parallel circuit using Electronic Workbench.

    Outcome 4:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to solve for all unknown values given 5 different parallel circuits. Ohm’s, Watt’s and Kirchhoff’s current laws will be used.

    Outcome 5:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to solve for all unknown values given 5 different series-parallel circuits. Ohm’s, Watt’s and Kirchhoff’s current and voltage laws will be used.

    Objectives

    1. Magnetism and Electromagnetism
      1. Explain the principles of the magnetic field
      2. Explain the principles of electromagnetism
      3. Describe the operation of various types of electromagnetic devices
      4. Explain magnetic hysteresis
      5. Discuss the principle of electromagnetic induction
      6. Describe various applications of magnetic induction
    2. Introduction to alternating current and voltage
      1. Identify a sinusoidal waveform and measure its characteristics
      2. Describe how sine waves are generated
      3. Determine the voltage and current values of sine waves
      4. Describe angular relationships of sine waves
      5. Mathematically analyze a sinusoidal waveform
      6. Apply basic circuit analysis to AC resistive circuits
      7. Determine total voltages that have both AC and DC components
      8. Identify the characteristics of basic non-sinusoidal waveforms
      9. Use an oscilloscope to measure waveforms
    3. Capacitors
      1. Describe the basic structure and characteristics of a capacitor
      2. Discuss various types of capacitors
      3. Analyze series and parallel connected capacitors
      4. Describe how a capacitor operates in a DC switching circuit
      5. Describe how a capacitor operates in an AC circuit
      6. Discuss various capacitor applications
      7. Test a capacitor
    4. RC (Resistor-Capacitor) circuits
      1. Describe the relationship between current and voltage in an RC circuit
      2. Determine impedance and phase angle in a series or parallel RC circuit
      3. Analyze a series or parallel RC circuit
      4. Analyze series-parallel RC circuits
      5. Determine power in an RC circuit
      6. Discuss basic RC circuit applications
      7. Troubleshoot RC circuits
    5. Inductors
      1. Describe the basic structure and characteristics of an inductor
      2. Discuss various types of inductors
      3. Analyze series and parallel connected inductors
      4. Describe how an inductor operates in a DC switching circuit
      5. Describe how an inductor operates in an AC circuit
      6. Discuss various inductor applications
      7. Test a capacitor
    6. RLC circuits and resonance
      1. Determine the impedance and phase angle of a series RLC circuit
      2. Analyze series and parallel RLC circuits
      3. Analyze a circuit for series or parallel resonance
      4. Analyze the operation of series or parallel resonant filters
      5. Discuss various system applications of resonant circuits
    7. Transformers
      1. Explain mutual inductance
      2. Describe how a transformer is constructed and how it works
      3. Explain how Step-Up and Step-Down transformers work
      4. Discuss the effect of a resistive load across the secondary winding
      5. Discuss the concept of reflected load in a transformer
      6. Discuss impedance matching with transformers
      7. Explain how transformers act as an isolation device
      8. Describe various types of transformers
      9. Troubleshoot circuits which use transformers

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Magnetism and Electromagnetism
      1. The magnetic field
      2. Electromagnetism
      3. Electromagnetic devices
      4. Magnetic hysteresis
      5. Electromagnetic induction
      6. Applications of electromagnetic induction
    2. Introduction to alternating current and voltage
      1. The sine wave
      2. Sinusoidal voltage sources
      3. Voltage and current values of sine waves
      4. Phase shift and angular measurement of sine waves
      5. Sine wave formulas
      6. Ohm’s law and Kirchoff’s law in AC circuits
      7. Superimposed DC and AC voltages
      8. Non-sinusoidal waveforms
      9. The oscilloscope
    3. Capacitors
      1. Types of capacitors
      2. Series and parallel capacitors
      3. Capacitors in DC and AC circuits
      4. Capacitor applications
      5. Testing capacitors
    4. RC (Resistor-Capacitor) circuits
      1. Sinusoidal response of RC circuits
      2. Impedance and phase angle of series and parallel RC circuits
      3. Analysis of series and parallel RC circuits
      4. Series-Parallel RC circuits
      5. Power in RC circuits
      6. Basic applications of RC circuits
      7. Troubleshooting RC circuits
    5. Inductors
      1. Types of inductors
      2. Series and parallel inductors
      3. Inductors in DC and AC circuits
      4. Inductor applications
      5. Testing inductors
    6. RLC circuits and resonance
      1. Impedance and phase angle of series RLC circuits
      2. Analysis of series RLC circuits
      3. Series and parallel resonance
      4. Series and parallel resonant filters
      5. RLC circuit applications
    7. Transformers
      1. Mutual inductance
      2. The basic transformer
      3. Step-Up and Step-Down transformers
      4. Loading the secondary
      5. Reflected load
      6. Matching source and load resistance
      7. Isolation transformers
      8. Other types of transformers
      9. Troubleshooting transformers

    Primary Faculty
    Dulinski, Kenneth
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Hinrichsen, Timothy



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ELEC 1182 - Semiconductor Theory & Devices


    Credits: 3.00
    (8 contact hrs per week for 8 weeks)
    (formerly ELEC-1181) ELEC-1182 provides students with the knowledge required to understand and troubleshoot electronic circuits containing diodes, transistors, FETs, and MOSFETs. Among the topics discussed are Thevenin’s Theorem, semiconductor theory, half-wave and full-wave rectifiers, transistor biasing circuits, FET and MOSFET biasing. Students will learn through lecture, textbook assignments, hands-on laboratory experimentation, and simulated virtual experiments utilizing computer software. South Campus.

    Pre & Co Requisite(s):  

    Prerequisite: ELEC-1171


    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course students will be able to analyze electronic circuits utilizing Thevenin’s Theorem.

    Objectives:

    1. Given an electronic schematic of a series circuit the student will calculate the Thevenin voltage and resistance of the circuit.
    2. Given an electronic schematic of a parallel circuit the student will calculate the Thevenin voltage and resistance of the circuit.
    3. Given an electronic schematic of a series-parallel circuit the student will calculate the Thevenin voltage and resistance of the circuit.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course students will be able to apply knowledge of semiconductor physics toward the analysis and evaluation of electronic circuits containing semiconductor devices.

    Objectives:

    1. Apply knowledge of the basic structure of semiconductor materials toward the analysis of semiconductor circuits.
    2. Demonstrate biasing of a PN junction.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of the course the student will be able to analyze, build and take measurements in electronic circuits which contain diodes.

    Objectives:

    1. Students will construct, analyze, and evaluate the operation of:
      1. Half wave and full wave rectifiers.
      2. Rectifier circuits which utilize electronic filtering.
      3. Diode limiters and clampers.
      4. Zener diodes
      5. Varactor diodes.
      6. Light emitting diodes and photo diodes.
    2. Interpret diode data sheets and apply that data to the analysis of circuitry.
    3. Troubleshoot and repair faults in power supplies and diode circuits.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of the course the student will be able to analyze, build and take measurements in electronics circuits which contain transistors.

    Objectives:

    1. Students will construct, analyze, and evaluate the operation of:
      1. Bipolar transistor biasing circuits.
      2. Bipolar transistor switching circuits.
      3. Junction Field Effect Transistor biasing circuits.
      4. Metal Oxide Semiconductor Field Effect Transistor biasing circuits.
    2. Identify for specific purposes BJT, FET, and MOSFET package configurations.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Thevenin’s Theorem
      1. Series circuits
      2. Parallel circuits
      3. Series-parallel circuits
    2. Introduction to Semiconductors
      1. Atomic structure
      2. Hole flow and electron flow
      3. N-type and P-type
      4. PN junctions
      5. Diode characteristics
    3. Diode Applications
      1. Half wave rectifiers
      2. Full wave rectifiers
      3. Filters and regulators
      4. Limiting and clamping circuits
      5. Special purpose diodes
        1. zener diodes
        2. varactor diodes
        3. Light Emitting Diodes
        4. Photodiodes
      6. Diode data sheets
      7. Troubleshooting diode circuits
    4. Transistors
      1. Bipolar Junction Transistors
      2. Junction Field Effect Transistors
      3. Metal Oxide Semiconductor Field Effect Transistors
      4. Biasing transistors
      5. Transistor packaging and terminal identification

    Primary Faculty
    Dulinski, Kenneth
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Hinrichsen, Timothy



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ELEC 1192 - Semiconductor Devices & Circuits


    Credits: 3.00
    (8 contact hrs per week for 8 weeks)
    (formerly EETE-2280) This course provides students with theory and practical experimentation using the following electronic devices: BJT, SCR, UJT, PUT, Triac, Diac, Four Layer Diode, SUS, SBS, Op-amps, and optoelectronic devices. Circuit designs include amplitude control, phase shift control, relaxation oscillators inverting, and non-inverting amplifiers. South Campus.

    Pre & Co Requisite(s):  

    Prerequisite: ELEC-1182


    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1:
    Upon completion of the course the student will be able to demonstrate the operation and perform basic measurements is a single stage BJT amplifier.

    Objectives:
    The students will be able to:

    1. Construct and evaluate a single stage BJT amplifier.
    2. Measure and compare the output and input signals in order to verify the gain of a single stage BJT amplifier.

    Outcome 2:
    Upon completion of the course the student will be able to analyze, build and take measurements in electronic circuits which contain thyristor devices.

    Objectives:
    The students will be able to:

    1. Construct and evaluate the operation of electronic circuits containing:
      1. Silicon Controlled Rectifiers
      2. Triacs
      3. Silicon Bilateral and Silicon Unilateral switches
      4. Diacs and Four Layer Diodes

    Outcome 3:
    Upon completion of the course the student will be able to analyze, build and take measurements in electronic circuits which contain Unijunction Transistors.

    Objectives:
    Students will be able to:

    1. Construct, analyze, and evaluate the operation of electronic circuits which perform the following functions:
      1. Timer operations utilizing UJT’s
      2. Relaxation Oscillators utilizing UJT’s
      3. SCR control utilizing UJT’s

    Outcome 4:
    Upon completion of the course the student will be able to analyze, build and take measurements in electronic circuits which contain operational amplifiers

    Objectives:
    Students will be able to:

    1. Construct and evaluate the operation of inverting amplifiers.
    2. Construct and evaluate the operation of non-inverting amplifiers.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Voltage Amplifiers
      1. Coupling and Bypass capacitors
      2. Base-Emitter resistance r’e
      3. The D.C equivalent circuit
      4. The A.C. equivalent circuit
      5. Deriving gain
    2. Silicon Controlled Rectifiers
      1. Two transistor model
      2. Device characteristics
      3. Amplitude control
      4. Firing delay and conduction angles
      5. Average load current and voltage
    3. Unijunction Transistors
      1. Resistor-diode model
      2. UJT characteristics
      3. Peak firing voltage
      4. Deriving values of Re(max) and Re(min)
      5. Relaxation oscillators
      6. UJT actuated SCR’s
      7. Programmable Unijunction Transistors (PUT’s)
    4. Triacs and other Thyristors
      1. Triac operational parameters
      2. Phase shift control
      3. Flash-on and soft start circuits
      4. Diac control
      5. SBS control
      6. Change in voltage over change in time (dv/dt)

    Primary Faculty
    Dulinski, Kenneth
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Hinrichsen, Timothy



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ELEC 1211 - Digital Electronics Basics


    Credits: 3.00
    (4 contact hrs)
    (formerly EETE-1210) This course will provide students with the knowledge required to understand and troubleshoot digital electronic circuits. Among the topics discussed are number systems, codes, logic gates, Boolean statements, combinational logic, flip-flops, counters, shift registers, memory and storage, and integrated circuit technologies. Knowledge will be gained through lecture, textbook assignments, hands-on laboratory experiments, and simulated virtual experiments utilizing virtual circuit software. South Campus.

    Pre & Co Requisite(s):  

    Prerequisite: ELEC-1171


    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will identify and describe introduction to digital concepts.

    Objectives:

    1. Explain the difference between digital and analog quantities.
    2. Show how voltage levels are used to represent digital quantities.
    3. Discuss various parameters involving pulse waveforms.
    4. Explain the basic logic operations of NOT, AND, and OR.
    5. Identify integrated circuits according to complexity and packaging.
    6. Identify pin numbers on integrated circuit packages.
    7. Recognize how test instruments are used to troubleshoot digital circuitry.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to identify and apply number systems, operations and codes.

    Objectives:

    1. Count in the binary numbering system.
    2. Convert between binary and hexadecimal.
    3. Express binary numbers in sign magnitude, 1 and 2’s complement.
    4. Convert between binary and decimal.
    5. Convert between decimal and BCD.
    6. Interpret ASCII code.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, the student will identify and apply logic gates.

    Objectives:

    1. Describe the operation of all basic logic gates.
    2. Describe the operation of XOR and ENOR logic.
    3. Understand timing diagrams.
    4. Make basic comparisons between TTL and CMOS gates.
    5. Troubleshoot logic gates.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, the student will apply logic simplification.

    Objectives:

    1. Understand the basic rules of Boolean logic statements.
    2. Apply DeMorgans theorem to simple Boolean expressions.
    3. Convert truth tables to sum of products logic.
    4. Use a Karnaugh map to simplify logic statements containing no more than 4 variables.
    5. Utilize NAND and NOR gates to implement any logic.
    6. Troubleshoot combinational circuits containing NANDS and NORS.

    Outcome 5: Upon completion of this course, the student will identify and apply flip-flops.

    Objectives:

    1. Recognize the difference between a latch and a flip-flop.
    2. Explain how various types of flip-flops differ in operation.
    3. Apply flip-flops in basic applications.
    4. Describe the difference between synchronous and asynchronous operation.
    5. Understand basic counter and shift register applications.
    6. Troubleshoot circuits containing flip-flops.

    Outcome 6: Upon completion of this course, the student will calculate and apply integrated circuit (IC) technologies.

    Objectives:

    1. Determine noise margins for various devices.
    2. Calculate power dissipation in IC’s.
    3. Explain how propagation delay affects operating speed.
    4. Use and interpret data sheets.
    5. Explain and determine fan-out for any device.
    6. Understand the difference between totem pole and open collector outputs.
    7. Describe the operation of tri-state devices.
    8. Properly terminate unused inputs.
    9. Handle CMOS devices properly without the risk of damage.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Introduction to Digital Concepts
      1. Digital and analog quantities
      2. Binary values
      3. Basic logic operations
      4. Integrated circuits
      5. Test instruments
    2. Number Systems, Operations and Codes
      1. Conversion between numbering systems
      2. Binary arithmetic
      3. 1 and 2’s complement
      4. Signed binary numbers
      5. Hexadecimal numbering system
      6. BCD, ASCII and other codes
      7. Parity checking
    3. Logic Gates
      1. Basic logic gates
        1. Inverter
        2. AND and OR
        3. NAND and NOR
        4. XOR and XNOR
      2. Integrated logic circuits
      3. Troubleshooting logic circuits
    4. Logic Simplification
      1. DeMorgans’ theorem
      2. Boolean expressions and truth tables
      3. Karnaugh mapping
    5. Combinational Logic
      1. Basic combinational logic
      2. Universal property of NAND and NOR gates
      3. Timing diagrams
      4. Troubleshooting combinational logic
    6. Flip-Flops
      1. Flip-flop operating characteristics
      2. Flip-flop circuit applications
      3. Synchronous and asynchronous operation
      4. Shift registers and up-down counters
    7. Integrated circuit technologies
      1. Basic operational characteristics and parameters
      2. CMOS and TTL logic families
      3. Other logic families (PMOS, NMOS E2CMOS, etc.)

    Primary Faculty
    Dulinski, Kenneth
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Hinrichsen, Timothy



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ELEC 1221 - Microcontrollers With Robotic Application


    Credits: 3.00
    (4 contact hrs)
    This course will provide students with the knowledge required to understand, program, and apply microcontrollers (pic chips) to robotic applications using the Basic Stamp. The first half of the class will be spent learning to program and interface simple circuitry using the Basic Stamp interface board. The second half of the class will be spent applying this knowledge to a mobile robot with onboard sensors. Among the topics discussed are pic chip programming, controlling inputs and outputs, motion and rotational control, digital displays, measurement of light, frequency and sound, controlling servo motors, robotic navigation, tactile sensing, light sensitive navigation, and robotic control with distance detection. Knowledge will be gained through lecture, textbook assignments, handson laboratory experiments, and project troubleshooting. South Campus.

    Pre & Co Requisite(s):  

    Prerequisite: ELEC-1211


    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome I:
    Upon completion of this course, students will identify microcontrollers.

    Objectives:

    1. Define microcontrollers.
    2. Discuss applications of microcontrollers.
    3. Familiarize with the Basic Stamp 2.
    4. Discuss advanced applications of the Basic Stamp.

    Outcome II:
    Upon completion of this course, students will identify and apply input‐output control.

    Objectives:

    1. Control L.E.D.’s with the Basic Stamp.
    2. Monitor inputs with the Basic Stamp.
    3. Understand counting and repeating loops.

    Outcome III:
    Upon completion of this course the student will identify and apply controlling motion.

    Objectives:

    1. Understand On/Off signals for motion control.
    2. Troubleshoot and test servo’s.
    3. Program servo position.
    4. Convert programmed position to motion.
    5. Control a servo with a potentiometer.

    Outcome IV:
    Upon completion of this course the student will identify and apply sensing analog values.

    Objectives:

    1. Convert analog values to read on 7 segment display.
    2. Understand basic light sensing and measurement.
    3. Produce programmed sound.
    4. Produce musical notes, simple songs and ring tones.

    Outcome V:
    Upon completion of this course the student will apply interfacing and timing.

    Objectives:

    1. Program current control through a transistor.
    2. Understand subsystem integration.
    3. Build and test RC timing circuit for programmed control.
    4. Develop and add a software subsystem.

    Outcome VI:
    Upon completion of this course the student will apply and operate robot servo motors.

    Objectives:

    1. Track time and repeat actions.
    2. Interface servo motors.
    3. Center servo motors.
    4. Store servo values and count.
    5. Test servo motors.
    6. Understand servo transfer curves.

    Outcome VII: Upon completion of this course the student will apply and program robot navigation.

    Objectives:

    1. Program basic maneuvers.
    2. Calculate distances.
    3. Simplify navigation with subroutines.
    4. Build complex maneuvers in EEPROM.
    5. Navigate with whiskers.
    6. Understand basic artificial intelligence.
    7. Navigate using visible light.
    8. Navigate using infrared.
    9. Test the frequency sweep.
    10. Follow a stripe.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Introduction to Microcontrollers
      1. Use of microcontrollers
      2. Applications of microcontrollers
      3. Becoming familiar with the Basic Stamp 2
      4. Advanced applications of the Basic Stamp
      5. Programming ASCII characters
    2. Input‐Output Control
      1. Controlling L.E.D.’s with the Basic Stamp
      2. Building an testing an L.E.D. circuit
      3. On/Off control with the Basic Stamp
      4. Counting and repeating
      5. Using current direction to control a bi‐color L.E.D.
      6. Receiving vs. sending high and low signals
      7. Testing a pushbutton with an L.E.D. circuit
      8. Reading a pushbutton with the Basic Stamp
      9. Reaction timer test
    3. Controlling Motion
      1. Microcontrolled motion
      2. On/Off signals and motion control
      3. Connecting and testing the servo
      4. Computerized control of position
      5. Converting position to motion
      6. Pushbutton controlled servo
      7. Measuring resistance by measuring time
      8. Reading a dial with the Basic Stamp
      9. Controlling a servo with a potentiometer
    4. Sensing Analog Values
      1. Digital displays
      2. Building and te sting a 7 segment display
      3. Displaying the position of a dial
      4. Introduction to photo sensing
      5. Building and testing a light meter
      6. Graphing light measurements
      7. Tracking light events
      8. Building and testing a speaker circuit
      9. Producing action sounds
      10. Producing musical notes and simple songs
      11. Cell phone ring tones
    5. Interfacing and Timing
      1. Interfacing integrated circuits
      2. Controlling current flow through a transistor
      3. Building and testing pushbutton circuits
      4. Building and testing RC timing circuits
      5. Subsystem integration
      6. Developing a software subsystem
    6. Robot Servo Motors
      1. Tracking time and rep eating actions
      2. Connecting the servo motors
      3. Centering servo motors
      4. Storing servo values and count
      5. Testing the servo motors
      6. Start/Reset indicator circuit and program
      7. Servo transfer curves
    7. Robot Navigation
      1. Programming basic maneuvers
      2. Calculating distances
      3. Ramping
      4. Simplifying navigation with subroutines
      5. Building complex maneuvers in EEPROM
      6. Building and testing whiskers
      7. Navigation with whiskers
      8. Understanding basic artificial intelligence
      9. Roaming and avoiding shadows
      10. Following a beam of light
      11. Building and testing IR pairs
      12. Field testing for object detection
      13. Infrared detection range adjustments
      14. Object detection and avoidance
      15. High performance IR navigation
      16. Drop - off detection
      17. Determining distance
      18. Testing the frequency sweep
      19. Following a stripe

    Primary Faculty
    Dulinski, Kenneth
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Hinrichsen, Timothy



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ELEC 1230 - Troubleshooting 1


    Credits: 3.00
    (4 contact hrs)
    Study of signal processing circuitry. Horizontal and vertical scan circuits, video display terminals, RF circuitry, power supplies. Use of test equipment to trace signal flow paths and to evaluate operating parameters. South Campus. Fall semester.

    Pre & Co Requisite(s):  

    Prerequisite: ELEC-1171

    Corequisite: ELEC-1240


    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1:
    Upon completion of this course the student will analyze and identify electrical schematics and block diagrams.

    Outcome 2:
    Upon completion of this course the student will identify and trace electrical signals.

    Outcome 3:
    Upon completion of this course the student will identify schematic symbols and components.

    Outcome 4:
    Upon completion of this course the student will use data sheets, and select replacement components.

    Outcome 5:
    Upon completion of this course the student will construct electrical circuits.

    Outcome 6:
    Upon completion of this course the student will use test equipment.

    Outcome 7:
    Upon completion of this course the student will troubleshoot and repair electronic circuits.

    Outcome 8:
    Upon completion of this course the student will remove and replace electronic components.

    Outcome 9:
    Upon completion of this course the student will test components.

    Outcome 10:
    Upon completion of this course the student will observe safety procedures.

    Objectives:
    Upon completion of this course and through the use of test equipment and proper service data, the student will be able to:

    1. Troubleshoot electronic circuits, locate, and replace defective components in these circuits.
    2. Solder and desolder various components in electronic circuits to effect repairs to the circuits.
    3. Recognize faults through observation, and to test and repair these faults.
    4. Test Cathode Ray Tubes as used in Video Monitors and display terminals.
    5. Select suitable replacement components.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Introduction to the course. Review of test equipment.
    2. Soldering and desoldering techniques. Types of solder used, melting points of solders. Temperature of iron tips.
    3. Troubleshooting problems in low voltage power supplies. Definitions of (shorts) (opens)(leakage) Testing of Semiconductors with a meter.
    4. Discuss the Block Diagram of a Black and White TV. Discuss the components of a composite video signal, including the timing of the scan signals needed to produce a raster.
    5. Testing and evaluation the horizontal oscillator and scan circuits. Locating and replacing the faulty components. Selecting and obtaining the replacement parts.
    6. Troubleshooting High Voltage shutdown circuits. (X-Ray protection Circuits).
    7. Guidelines for the replacement in the category of (critical Component) Replacement component selection.
    8. Testing and evaluating vertical oscillator and scan circuits. Problems, methods used to locate and replace the defective components. Readjustment of the circuits for proper scan of the CRT.
    9. No hold control circuits, vertical and horizontal frequency dividers.
    10. Discuss the differences between monitors and TV’s using Block Diagrams.
    11. Techniques used in troubleshooting video signal processing circuits. Signal injection, signal tracing, voltage measurement.
    12. Brightness and contrast problems, methods used to determine if the brightness problems are in the video signal processors or in some other section of the device.
    13. Sync separation, evaluation of circuits after the repairs have been completed.
    14. Audio problems. Signal tracing and signal injection to locate problem area.
    15. High voltage measurement, troubleshooting high voltage circuits.
    16. Cathode Ray Tubes, testing for emission, gas, gun balance. Test equipment required for these tests, use of the equipment, evaluation of the tests.
    17. Replacement of CRT. Safety precautions. Selection of the proper type of replacement.

    Primary Faculty
    Dulinski, Kenneth
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Hinrichsen, Timothy



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ELEC 1240 - Troubleshooting 2


    Credits: 3.00
    (4 contact hrs)
    Diagnosis of faults in signal processing circuits and associated control circuits. Fault location and correction in video display terminals. Replacement procedures for defective components. Use of test equipment to locate defective components. South Campus. Fall semester.

    Pre & Co Requisite(s):  

    Prerequisite: ELEC-1230


    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1:
    Upon completion of this course, the student will analyze and identify electrical schematics and block diagrams.

    Outcome 2:
    Upon completion of this course, the student will identify and trace electrical signals.

    Outcome 3:
    Upon completion of this course, the student will identify schematic symbols and components.

    Outcome 4:
    Upon completion of this course, the student will use data sheets, and select replacement components.

    Outcome 5:
    Upon completion of this course, the student will construct electrical circuits.

    Outcome 6:
    Upon completion of this course, the student will use test equipment.

    Outcome 7:
    Upon completion of this course, the student will troubleshoot and repair electronic circuits.

    Outcome 8:
    Upon completion of this course, the student will remove and replace electronic components.

    Outcome 9:
    Upon completion of this course, the student will test components.

    Objectives
    Upon completion of this course and through the use of test equipment and proper service data, the student will be able to:

    1. Troubleshoot electronic circuits, locate and replace defective components in these circuits.
    2. Solder and desolder various components in electronic circuits to effect repairs to the circuits.
    3. Recognize faults through observation, and to test and repair these faults.
    4. Test Cathode Ray Tubes as used in Video Monitors and display terminals.
    5. Select suitable replacement components.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Introduction to the course. Review of test equipment.
    2. Discuss the principles of color, the limitations of the human eye and the use of these limitations in the formation of the color video signals which are added to the black and white transmition.
    3. Study the current method of creating, adding, and transmitting the complete color video signal. The Block Diagram will be used extensively to explain the formation process.
    4. Presentation of a complete Block Diagram of a color TV with emphasis on those blocks which are used to process color signals and show them on the CRT.
    5. Block by block analysis showing the circuitry of each block with emphasis on troubleshooting.
    6. Presentation of Tube Circuit theory to give students an ability to recognize and trace signals through tube type equipment.
    7. Block by block analysis of each circuit previously done but now in Tube format. Again with emphasis on the troubleshooting methods needed to isolate any fault.
    8. Demonstrate the methods of testing, removing, replacing a color picture tube.
    9. Discuss the procedure used to align the television before returning it to the customer. Includes: power supply adjustments, grayscale, linearity, purity, color convergence.
    10. Review and final examination.

    Primary Faculty
    Dulinski, Kenneth
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Hinrichsen, Timothy



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ELEC 1250 - Introduction to Audio & Video Technology


    Credits: 2.00
    (2 contact hrs)
    This course focuses on application of electronic concepts with components in audio and video technology. Also covered are mechanical hookups, connections and basic electronic troubleshooting, and servicing. The student will become familiar with basic electronic equipment used in an audio and video studio, and troubleshoot operational and connection problems. South Campus.

    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to set up a simulated audio-video studio in a lab classroom studio for recording and playback.

    Objectives:

    1. Connect an audio and video classroom simulation.
    2. Connect an audio recording studio simulation.
    3. Inspect a studio setup for cabling errors.
    4. Use service information to identify input and output connections.
    5. Become familiar with various audio and video equipment manufacturers.

    Outcome 2:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to operate a simulated audio-video studio in a lab environment for recording and playback.

    Objectives:

    1. Use service information to identify correct equipment operations.
    2. Become familiar with various audio and video equipment manufacturers.
    3. Make an audio recording.
    4. Make a video recording.

    Outcome 3:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to inspect and troubleshoot cabling and equipment used in the studio environment.

    Objectives:

    1. Service defective cables.
    2. Troubleshoot an audio recording setup.
    3. Troubleshoot a video recording setup.
    4. Obtain the knowledge to locate operation and service information about audio and video equipment in the studio.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. The history and technological development of electronics applied to broadcasting TV, VCR, and DVD technology
      1. The nature of broadcast signals and the distinction between VHF and UHF Signals
      2. Lab
        1. An overview in the use of measuring/testing equipment such as oscilloscopes, meters, test tapes, etc.
        2. Cords & connectors, fuses, etc.
        3. Cable making (coaxial, “F”, XLR audio, and stereo ¼ in.)
    2. The nature and measurement of sound
      1. Sound waves
      2. Hearing sound
      3. Decibels of sound
      4. Decibels of power and voltage
      5. Use of the VU meter
      6. Use of the sound level meter
      7. Lab: Use of the Shure six-channel microphone mixer (Use handout instructions)
        1. Front panel, connectors, and controls
        2. Rear panel, connectors and controls
        3. Hook up a microphone to one of the six inputs
        4. Hook to microphone
        5. Plug in AC power
        6. Check out operation
        7. Head phone use
    3. Microphones
      1. Sensitivity
      2. Frequency response
      3. Pick up patterns
      4. Dispersion and use
      5. Elements and housings
      6. Lab: Cords and connectors
        1. Make a cable with two ¼-in. stereo solder on connectors (tip, ring, sleeve)
        2. Make a cable with two XLR audio solder on connectors
        3. Check out the cables with an ohm meter
        4. Hook up to the Shure M367 and check out the cables
    4. Speaker Systems
      1. Drivers
      2. Enclosures
      3. Electronic circuits
      4. Lab
        1. Speaker performance (different sizes in ohms)
        2. Troubleshooting cables and connectors. See Ch. no. 14 & 15 text
    5. Magnetic tape systems
      1. Magnetic tape (overview)
      2. Drive systems
      3. Control systems
      4. Magnetic tape heads
      5. Record and play back
      6. Lab
        1. Maintenance procedures
          1. Cleaning, demagnetizing, tape splicing, cassettes and cartridges
        2. Set up a VCR with a monitor, record, and play back a test tape
        3. Instructor’s demonstration on how to remove a stuck tape
          1. Manual
          2. With a 9V battery
          3. Go over the cassette construction
        4. Troubleshooting
    6. MX-4 Multiple-Source Video Production
      1. Understanding the MX-4 connectors
      2. Lab: Note the cables associated with each connector on the MX-4 rear panel
        1. Power-AC power to an electrical outlet
        2. Video in Y/C- Connect S- video sources
        3. Video in - connect composite sources
        4. Audio - Connect audio devices to these connectors. Each set has a (left) and a (right) for stereo
        5. HB In - Connect a composite source such as a camera to lock on to and synchronize the MX-4 with it
        6. GPI Control- Connect a general purpose interface (GPI) device to this jack to control the MX-4 from an external device. There are a total of ten output connectors, one preview, two composite, two S-video, four audio, and a headphone jack.
        7. Preview out - Connect a composite video monitor to this jack. You cannot use an S-video monitor as preview. This monitor serves as your usual ” interface” with the MX-4. It’s where you do your most work.
        8. Y/C out - Connect an S-video output device, You record productions on this device, use it to display a live broadcast signal or both.
        9. OUT - Connect a composite output device, same as above, but use this connector if your output device is composite format.
        10. AUDIO OUT - Connect a suitable audio cable from these jacks to the audio inputs on your output device.
        11. HEADPHONES - Refer to using headphones
        12. Use handouts for the MX-4
    7. Video
      1. Monitors
      2. Cameras
      3. Lab
        1. Cables & Power supply
        2. Use in the lab camcorder and cameras as used in the lab
        3. How to turn a TV into a monitor
    8. The concept of broadcast TV signal
      1. The UHF, VHF, and cable signals
      2. Lab
        1. The function of various adapters in properly completing basic TV/VCR hookups
        2. Discuss and view rear panel of the VCR
        3. Install adaptors such as the R.F switch, signal splitting, etc.
        4. Hook up handouts 1, 2, and 3
    9. Review video system component identification of, resistor, diode, and transistor identification
      1. Component functions
      2. Digital multimeter review
      3. Hand outs
      4. Lab
        1. Digital multimeter function and tests of fuses, resistors, transistors, diodes, and cables
    10. Introduction to black and white TV
      1. Picture transmission
      2. Scanning lines
      3. Raster formation
      4. The vidicon TV camera tube
      5. A TV picture tube
      6. Show a VCR tape
      7. Lab
        1. Hook up the SR-VS300 Min DV/S - VHS recorder
        2. Hook it up to a monitor
        3. Play a test tape with the VCR
        4. Record a test signal on the mini DVD
    11. Review the composite video signal, explain the RF wave form and amplitude. Explain:
      1. The modulated composite video signal
      2. The complete VHF and UHF frequency spectrum for each channel
      3. The CATV converter (cable box)
      4. The frequency system spectrum for CATV systems
      5. Lab
        1. Hook up the antenna and balum to a bench TV
        2. Use 300 ohm and coax 75 ohm cables
        3. Adapt BNC to “F” connectors
        4. Hook up a VCR to a monitor (Play a test tape)
        5. Hook up a DVD to a monitor
        6. Test D&E with the color bars from the test bench
        7. Show the composite video signal on an “O” scope
    12. Common uses for the MX-4. You can connect one of the following
      1. VCRs
      2. Camcorders
      3. Video disc players
      4. Cameras
      5. Live video - Multiple input and output sources
        1. Source - A source is an input device, Each source provides a video signal, audio signal, or both. You use the MX-4 to combine the signals.
        2. Output - An output device is a device on which you record and/or broadcast a signal. The signal might contain video, audio, or both. This signal is often a mix of signals coming from the MX-4.
        3. Preview monitor
        4. Program monitor
      6. Lab: Using the MX-4,
        1. Connect a composite - type monitor to MX-4’s preview out jack
        2. Connect an input source (such as a VCR or Camcorder) to the MX-4’s S-Video in 1 jack
        3. Connect a second input source to the MX-4’s S-Video in 2 jack
        4. Connect an output device to the out jacks on the MX-4’s rear panel. This is the device where you record the program.
        5. Connect a television or monitor to the recording VCR according to their instructions
        6. Connect the MX-4 power supply to the to the power supply jack on the rear panel
        7. Connect the MX-4 power cord to a suitable outlet
        8. Turn on all devices (The MX-4 power switch is located on the right end of the unit) and let the tapes roll
    13. Discuss the color bar generator
      1. The purpose of the color bar generator is to act as a substitute transmitter. As such it supplies to the receiver a known nonvaring color pattern that can be used for equipment adjustment and troubleshooting purposes. There are two types of color bar generators in use:
        1. The NTSC (National Television Systems Committee) generator
        2. The Gated Rainbow color bar generator
      2. Lab
        1. Hook up a VCR to the bench antenna with a color bar signal
        2. Make a test tape by recording all of the color bar signals
    14. The TV picture tubes and associated circuits
      1. Basic structures
      2. Glass envelope
      3. Essential features of a black and white and color picture tube
      4. World wide type designation systems
      5. The electron gun
      6. Phosphor screen and shadow mask
      7. Lab: Demonstrate color adjustment procedure (hand out)
        1. Hook up a color bar generator
        2. Degauss the picture tube (CRT)
        3. The instructor will demonstrate color alignment
    15. Field Trip to the video lab, MACA R-124
    16. Final exam

    Primary Faculty
    Dulinski, Kenneth
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Hinrichsen, Timothy



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ELEC 1300 - Electric Theory - Electrical Equipment & Introduction to Machine Circuits


    Credits: 2.00
    (2 contact hrs)
    (formerly ATEE-1300) After a brief introduction to the fundamentals of electricity, this course covers wire size, insulation, connections, and wiring methods. Topics also include switches, relays, motor starters, and other control components. ELEC-1300 also introduces machine tool control circuits, maintenance procedures, and safe working practices. South Campus.

    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to identify the type and usage of wire tables.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify the type of insulation and conductor a wire is composed of.
    2. Properly use the wire tables to select a conductor.
    3. Identify wires used for motors.

    Outcome 2:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to identify components in a ladder logic circuit.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify and describe the operation of a grounded and an ungrounded circuit.
    2. Identify JIC symbols on an electrical schematic.
    3. Using NEC, properly select components for circuits.

    Outcome 3:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to identify the various types of conduits.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify the various types of conduits.
    2. Properly use the conduit tables to select a conduit.
    3. Calculate conduit fill.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Fundamentals of Electricity
    2. Ohm’s Law, Watt’s Law, Series Circuits, Parallel Circuits
    3. Conductors, Allowable Ampacities
    4. Conduits and Fittings
    5. Magnetism and Electromagnetism
    6. AC, DC Single Phase Three Phase Power System
    7. Transformers
    8. Three Phase Systems
    9. Machining Controlling Devices
    10. Fuses, Circuit Breakers, Disconnects
    11. Motor Across the Line Starters
    12. Elementary Diagrams and Circuits

    Primary Faculty
    Dulinski, Kenneth
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Hinrichsen, Timothy



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ELEC 1310 - Electrical - Basic Direct & Alternating Current Motor Control Circuits


    Credits: 2.00
    (2 contact hrs)
    (formerly ATEE-1250) ELEC-1310 provides an introduction to D.C. and A.C. motor control circuits. Topics include fundamental concepts of electricity and magnetism, series and parallel circuits, D.C. motors and generators, basic electrical instruments, A.C. motors, and electric motor control symbols and circuits. South Campus.

    Pre & Co Requisite(s):  

    Prerequisite: ATAM-1350 or ELEC-1300


    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to describe the operation of AC motors.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify the parts of an A.C. and D.C. motor
    2. Single phase motors
    3. Three phase motors

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to describe the operation of DC motors.

    Objectives:

    1. Series motors
    2. Shunt motor
    3. Complex motor

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Orientation - Single-Phase Motor and Introduction
    2. Motor Maintenance and Installation
    3. Basic Motor Control
    4. Controllers, Relays and Timers
    5. Three Phase Motors and Generators
    6. Three Phase Motors, controls and Full Voltage Starting
    7. Motor Acceleration and Deceleration
    8. Special Motors
    9. Power Distribution and Monitoring Systems
    10. D.C. Motors, Generators and Controls

    Primary Faculty
    Dulinski, Kenneth
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Hinrichsen, Timothy



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ELEC 2005 - Discrete Amplifiers & Introduction to Op-Amps


    Credits: 3.00
    (4 contact hrs)
    (formerly EETE-1191) ELEC-2005 provides students theory and practical experimentation dealing with discrete transistor amplifiers and basic operational amplifier circuits. Among the circuits to be discussed are Voltage, Power, CC and CB amplifiers as well as inverting, non-inverting, differential, and summing op-amp amplifiers. South Campus.

    Pre & Co Requisite(s):  

    Prerequisite: ELEC-1192


    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of the course the student will be able to analyze, build and take measurements in transistor amplifier circuits.

    Objectives: Students will be able to:

    1. Construct and evaluate a single stage BJT amplifier
    2. Construct and evaluate a multi-stage amplifier circuit
    3. Construct and evaluate Common Base and Common Collector Amplifiers
    4. Analyze and evaluate Power Amplifiers
    5. Analyze and evaluate Differential Amplifiers

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of the course the student will be able to analyze, build and take measurements in electronic circuits which contain Operational Amplifiers.

    Objectives: Students will be able to:

    1. Construct and evaluate inverting and non-inverting amplifiers
    2. Demonstrate through lab the use of linear integrated circuits
    3. Evaluate the necessity of negative feedback in op-amp circuits

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of the course the student will be able to analyze, build and take measurements in Linear Op-Amp Circuits

    Objectives: Students will be able to:

    1. Construct, analyze, and evaluate the operation of electronic circuits which perform the following op-amp functions:
      1. Inverting and non-inverting amplifiers
      2. Differential amplifiers
      3. Instrumentation amplifiers
      4. Summing amplifiers
    2. Students will analyze current boosters and voltage controlled current sources.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Voltage Amplifiers
      1. Voltage Gain
      2. Loading Effects
      3. Multistage Amplifiers
      4. Troubleshooting
    2. Common Collector and Common Base Amplifiers
      1. Common Collector Amplifier
      2. Input and Output Impedance
      3. Darlington Connections
      4. Voltage Regulation
      5. Common Base Amplifier
    3. Power Amplifiers
      1. AC and DC Load Lines
      2. Class A, B, and C amplifiers
    4. Differential Amplifiers
      1. DC Analysis
      2. AC Analysis
      3. Input Characteristics
      4. Common Mode Gain
    5. Operational Amplifiers (Op-Amps)
      1. 741 Op-Amp
      2. Inverting and Non-inverting Amplifiers
      3. Op-Amp Applications
      4. Linear Integrated Circuits
    6. Negative Feedback
      1. Voltage Controlled Voltage Source
      2. Current Controlled Voltage Source
      3. Voltage Controlled Current Source
      4. Current Controlled Current Source
      5. Bandwidth and Gain
    7. Linear Op-Amp Circuits
      1. Inverting and Non-Inverting Amplifiers
      2. Instrumentation Amplifiers
      3. Summing Amplifiers
      4. Single Supply Operation

    Primary Faculty
    Dulinski, Kenneth
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Hinrichsen, Timothy



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ELEC 2010 - Instrumentation 1-Transducer Theory


    Credits: 3.00
    (8 contact hrs per week for 8 weeks)
    (formerly EETE-2010) ELEC-2010 covers theory and application of the following devices and topics: Thevenin’s Theorem, operational amplifiers, passive and active filters, loading, oscilloscope operation and the following transducers: I.C. temperature, thermistor, RTD, thermocouple, capacitance sensor, strain gauge, LVDT and others. Students will use Electronics Workbench to simulate electronic circuits and instrumentation.

    Pre & Co Requisite(s):  

    Prerequisite: ELEC-1211


    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1:
    Upon completion of this course, students will become familiar with devices such as amplifiers, filters, and oscilloscopes.

    Objectives:

    1. Explain the operation and determine values for the following transducers: IC temperature sensor, Thermistor, RTD, thermocouple, capacitance, strain gauge, ultrasonic, infrared controller, and led, with an accuracy of 70%.
    2. Verify the operation of an operational amplifier used as an integrator and differentiators with an accuracy of 80%, by comparing the calculated values with the measured values.

    Outcome 2:
    Upon completion of this course, students will acquire knowledge of transducers.

    Objectives:

    1. Explain the operation and determine values for the following transducers: IC temperature sensor, Thermistor, RTD, thermocouple, capacitance, strain gauge, ultrasonic, infrared controller, and led, with an accuracy of 70%.
    2. Demonstrate the use of an oscilloscope by measuring the inputs and the output of operational amplifier circuits, with an accuracy of 80%.

    Outcome 3:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to be able to use software to simulate electronic circuits and instrumentation.

    Objectives:

    1. Explain the operation and determine values for the following transducers: IC temperature sensor, Thermistor, RTD, thermocouple, capacitance, strain gauge, ultrasonic, infrared controller, and led, with an accuracy of 70%.
    2. Simplify electronic circuits using Thevenin’s Theorem, with an accuracy of 80%.
    3. Demonstrate the use of an oscilloscope by measuring the inputs and the output of operational amplifier circuits, with an accuracy of 80%.
    4. Verify the operation of an operational amplifier used as an integrator and differentiators with an accuracy of 80%, by comparing the calculated values with the measured values.

    Outcome 4:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to be able to simplify electronic circuits.

    Objectives:

    1. Simplify electronic circuits using Thevenin’s Theorem, with an accuracy of 80%.
    2. Verify the operation of an operational amplifier used as an integrator and differentiators with an accuracy of 80%, by comparing the calculated values with the measured values.Upon completion of this course, students will be able to be able to simplify electronic circuits.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    Week Topic Assignment

    1. Introduction
      Lecture: Thevenins Theorem and Loading
      Lab: Experiment 1
    2. Lecture: Oscilloscope and Analog Signal Conditioning
      Lab: Experiment 2
    3. Lecture: Oscilloscope and Analog Signal Conditioning
      Lab: Experiment 2
    4. Lecture: Analog Signal Conditioning
      Lab: Operational Amplifiers
    5. Lecture: IC Temperature Transducer
      Lab: Experiments 2-1 and 2-2
    6. Lecture: The Thermistor
      Lab: Experiments 3-1 and 3-2
    7. Lecture: The RTD
      Lab: Experiments 4-1 and 4-2
    8. Finish all labs from weeks 1 - 7
    9. MID-TERM EXAM
    10. Lecture: The Thermocouple
      Lab: Experiments 5-1 and 5-2
    11. Lecture: The Capacitance Sensor
      Lab: Experiments 6-1
    12. Lecture: The Strain Gage
      Lab: Experiments 7-1 and 7-2
    13. Lecture: Ultrasonic Transducers
      Lab: Experiments 8-1 and 8-2
    14. Lecture: The Infrared Controller
      Lab: Experiments 9-1 and 9-2
    15. Finish all labs from weeks 10 -15
    16. Final Exam

    Primary Faculty
    Dulinski, Kenneth
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Hinrichsen, Timothy



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ELEC 2150 - LabVIEW Basics 1


    Credits: 3.00
    (8 contact hrs per week for 8 weeks)
    (formerly ELEC-2911) ELEC-2150 will provide an introduction to the LabVIEW graphical system design platform. Students create, edit, and execute programs that utilize basic LabVIEW functions. South Campus.

    Pre & Co Requisite(s):  

    Prerequisite: ELEC-1211 or approval of program advisor


    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to utilize features which will reconfigure the general physical and software layouts of the LabVIEW programming environment.

    Objectives:

    1. Define dataflow and what is meant by ‘Graphical Programming Language’.
    2. Describe and utilize the NI example finder.
    3. Describe what is meant by ‘data acquisition’.
    4. Describe the function of the ‘General Purpose Interface Bus (GPIB)’.

    Outcome 2:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to develop and edit functional block diagrams and front panels.

    Objectives:

    1. Design and implement various front panel controls and indicators.
    2. Connect and manipulate nodes and wires in the block diagram.
    3. Demonstrate good LabVIEW project management techniques.
    4. Work with and manipulate SubVIs, along with their icons and connectors.
    5. Locate various toolbars and pull down menus for the purpose of implementing specific functions.
    6. Locate and utilize the context help window.
    7. Run a Virtual Instrument (VI).

    Outcome 3:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to load, save, and debug VIs.

    Objectives:

    1. Execute save and load dialogs.
    2. Demonstrate the use of the revert function.
    3. Troubleshoot broken VIs.
    4. Single-Step through a VI.
    5. Implement execution highlighting and setting break points.
    6. Create SubVIs
    7. Use sound practice to document LabVIEW projects.

    Outcome 4:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to control program execution through structures such as ‘For-While’ loops and ‘Case Structures’.

    Objectives:

    1. Execute ‘For’ loops and ‘While’ loops.
    2. Utilize shift registers in conjunction with loops.
    3. Utilize ‘Case’ structures to control program execution.
    4. Use the ‘Select’ function for if-then-else scenarios.
    5. Implement ‘Timing’ functions.
    6. Input algebraic formulas via ‘Formula Nodes’ and ‘Expression Nodes’.
    7. Combine ‘While Loops’ with ‘Case Structure’.

    Outcome 5:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to utilize composite data in the form of Arrays and Clusters.

    Objectives:

    1. Create Array controls and indicators.
    2. Use ‘Auto-Indexing’.
    3. Create Cluster controls and indicators.
    4. Interchange arrays and clusters.
    5. Utilize Error Clusters and Error Handling functions.

    Outcome 6:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to use Charts and Graphs.

    Objectives:

    1. Implement both single and multiple plot waveform charts.
    2. Implement both single and multiple plot waveform graphs.
    3. Create X-Y graphs.
    4. Create intensity charts and graphs utilizing color as a 3rd dimension.
    5. Add timestamps to charts and graphs.
    6. Create mixed signal graphs containing both analog and digital data.
    7. Export images of charts and graphs.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Introduction to LabVIEW
      1. Dataflow and Graphical Programming Language
      2. Example Finder
      3. Temperature System Example
    2. Virtual Instrumentation
      1. Data Acquisition
      2. General Purpose Interface Bus (GPIB)
      3. Communication via the Serial Port
      4. Internet connectivity and networking
      5. Add-on Toolkits
      6. Various Communication Mechanisms
    3. LabVIEW Operating Environment
      1. Front Panels, Controls and Indicators
      2. Block Diagrams
      3. LabVIEW Projects
      4. SubVI’s
      5. Alignment Grid
      6. Pull-Down Menus
      7. Floating Palettes
      8. Toolbars
      9. Pop-Up Menus
      10. Help Window
      11. Express and Sub VIs
    4. LabVIEW Foundations
      1. Creating VIs
      2. Basic Controls and Indicators
      3. Wire Routing
      4. Running VIs
      5. Keyboard Shortcuts and Tips
      6. Loading and Saving VIs
      7. Debugging Techniques
      8. Creating SubVIs
      9. Documenting Projects
      10. Printing
    5. Controlling Program Execution with Structures
      1. For and While Loops
      2. Shift Registers
      3. Case Structure
      4. Sequence Structure
      5. Timed Structures
      6. Formula and Expression Nodes
      7. Combining While Loops with Case Structure
    6. Arrays and Clusters
      1. Array Controls and Indicators
      2. Auto-Indexing
      3. Two Dimensional Arrays
      4. Compound Arithmetic
      5. Cluster Controls and Indicators
      6. Interchangeable Arrays and Clusters
      7. Error Clusters and Error Handling Functions
    7. Charts and Graphs
      1. Waveform Charts
      2. Waveform Graphs
      3. X-Y Graphs
      4. Chart and Graph Components
      5. Intensity Charts and Graphs
      6. Time Stamps
      7. Mixed Signal Graphs
      8. Exporting Images

    Primary Faculty
    Dulinski, Kenneth
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Hinrichsen, Timothy



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ELEC 2160 - LabVIEW Basics 2


    Credits: 3.00
    (8 contact hrs per week for 8 weeks)
    (formerly ELEC-2912) ELEC-2160 will build upon the foundation of knowledge established in ELEC-2150 in further exploring the functionality of the LabVIEW programming platform. South Campus.

    Pre & Co Requisite(s):  

    Prerequisite: ELEC-2150


    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to assemble and manipulate Strings and File I/O.

    Objectives:

    1. Insert and execute various “” codes.
    2. Assemble and execute String Functions.
    3. Assemble and execute Parsing Functions.
    4. Implement File I/O Functions.

    Outcome 2:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate a working knowledge of Signal Measurement and Data Acquisition (DAQ).

    Objectives:

    1. Define various acronyms associated with DAQ.
    2. Interface the computer to real world devices.
    3. Define the various types and classification of signals that can be acquired.
    4. Compare conditioned and unconditioned signals. E. Implement and define signal sampling and aliasing.
    5. Select and define the configuration of DAQ hardware based upon the type of input data.

    Outcome 3:
    Upon completion of this course, students will utilize DAQ in order to interface to real-world projects.

    Objectives:

    1. Utilize the DAQ assistant.
    2. Define various terms associated with LabVIEW DAQ.
    3. Implement the use of NI-DAQmx tasks.
    4. Design a VI or subVI, which will stream data to a file.
    5. Utilize counters in order to measure digital events.

    Outcome 4:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to interface to Instrument Control logic.

    Objectives:

    1. Define Instrumentation Acronyms.
    2. Interface the LabVIEW platform to external instruments.
    3. Define the structure of Virtual Instrument Software Architecture (VISA).
    4. Utilize the Instrument I/O Assistant.

    Outcome 5:
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to utilize advanced LabVIEW Structures and Functions.

    Objectives:

    1. Apply Local, Global, and Shared Variables.
    2. Control Parallel Loops.
    3. Affect program control via Property and Invoke Nodes.
    4. Implement Event Driven Programs.
    5. Utilize Type Definitions to simplify program edits.
    6. Design VIs with State Machines and the Queued Message Handlers.
    7. Implement programmed Structures for Disabling Code.
    8. Halt VI and Application Execution.
    9. Enhance the Graphic User Interface (GUI).

    Outcome 6: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to utilize advanced LabVIEW Data concepts.

    Objectives:

    1. Design and edit Polymorphic VIs.
    2. Implement programming language which manipulates Advanced File I/O.
    3. Reconfigure (INI) Files.
    4. Utilize Advanced Conversions and Typecasting.
    5. Convert Dissimilar Data Types to Variants.

    Outcome 7: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to utilize advanced LabVIEW features.

    Objectives:

    1. Utilize the ‘Options’ dialog under Tools.
    2. Configure VI options.
    3. Manipulate Program Property options.
    4. Adjust Window Appearance options.
    5. Adjust Print and Execution options.
    6. Allow for Keyboard Navigation.
    7. Navigate within the VI Server.
    8. Understand Radices and Units.
    9. Create a SubVI from a Section of Block Diagram.

    Outcome 8: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to explore and implement LabVIEW Connectivity.

    Objectives:

    1. Configure LabVIEW’s built- in Web Server.
    2. Publish HTML with LabVIEW’s Web Server.
    3. Design and implement Remote Panels.
    4. Design VIs which can share variables over a network.
    5. Communicate with .NET and ActiveX Servers.
    6. Design Network VIs.
    7. Construct databases.
    8. Create and manipulate Reports.

    Outcome 9: Upon completion of this course, students will incorporate an aesthetically pleasing Graphical User Interface as part of the overall programming process.

    Objectives:

    1. Arrange, Decorate, Resize, Group, and Lock a Front Panel.
    2. Create Custom Front Panel Controls.
    3. Manipulate Text, Fonts and Color of a Front Panel.
    4. Import Graphs and Pictures for a Front Panel.
    5. Modularize VIs.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Exploring Strings and File I/O
      1. Using String Functions
      2. Parsing Functions
      3. File Input/Output
    2. Signal Measurement, Generation and Data Acquisition (DAQ)
      1. Connecting the computer to the real world
      2. Various types of signals
      3. Configuring DAQ hardware
    3. Data Acquisition
      1. Digital and Analog I/O
      2. NI-DAQmx Tasks
      3. Advanced DAQ
    4. Instrument Control
      1. Connecting a computer to instruments
      2. SCPI instrument language
      3. VISA instrument communication
      4. Instrument control
    5. Advanced Structures and Functions
      1. Local, Global and Shared variables
      2. Property nodes
      3. Invoke nodes
      4. Event Driven programming
      5. Type definitions
      6. The State Machine and Queued Message Handler
      7. Messaging and synchronization
      8. Structures for disabling code
      9. Halting VI and application execution
    6. Advanced Data Concepts
      1. Advanced text, binary and configuration files
      2. Calling code from other languages
      3. Variants
    7. Advanced Features
      1. Configuring a VI
      2. The VI server
      3. Radices and Units
      4. Automatically creating a subVI from a section of Block Diagram
    8. Connectivity
      1. LabVIEW web server
      2. Emailing data
      3. Remote Panels
      4. Sharing data over a network
      5. Databases
    9. The Art of Programming
      1. Arranging, decorating, resizing, grouping, and locking
      2. Custom controls and indicators
      3. Adding online help
      4. Memory and performance

    Primary Faculty
    Dulinski, Kenneth
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Hinrichsen, Timothy



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ELEC 2270 - Microcontroller Programming


    Credits: 3.00
    (8 contact hrs per week for 8 weeks)
    (formerly EETE-2270) ELEC-2270 stresses the concepts of microcontroller programming including instruction sets, loops, software delays and data structures. South Campus.

    Pre & Co Requisite(s):  

    Prerequisite: ELEC-1192 or ELEC-2005

    Prerequisite: ELEC 1211


    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1:
    Upon completion of this course, students will employ microcontroller programming concepts.

    Objectives:
    The student will:

    1. Write and debug micro controller programs in assembly language or a higher-level language.
    2. Assemble or compile a program by hand or use an assembler or a compiler.

    Outcome 2:
    Upon completion of this course, students will develop instruction sets loops, software delays and data structure.

    Objectives:
    The student will:

    1. Assemble or compile a program by hand or use an assembler or a compiler.
    2. Load the program to a micro controller and run the program.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    Week  Topics
    1 & 2 Apply computer numbering systems
      Write computer programs
      Operate computerized equipment
       
    3 & 4 Write computer programs
      Operate computerized equipment
       
    5 & 6 Write computer programs
      Operate computerized equipment
       
    7 & 8 Write computer programs
      Operate computerized equipment
       
    9 & 10 Write computer programs
      Analyze electronic circuits
       
    11 & 12 Write computer programs
      Analyze electronic circuits
       
    13 & 14 Write computer programs
      Analyze solid-state devices
      Analyze electronic circuits
       
    15 & 16  Write computer programs
      Analyze solid-state devices

    Primary Faculty
    Dulinski, Kenneth
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Hinrichsen, Timothy



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ELEC 2370 - Electrical - Polyphase Alternating Current Fundamentals, Electrical Instruments & Illumination


    Credits: 2.00
    (2 contact hrs)
    (formerly ATEE-2360) ELEC-2370 covers three and four-wire two-phase circuits, three-phase induction, star and delta circuits, power, balanced and unbalanced loads, transformer principles, characteristics and connection, electrical instruments, self- synchronous systems, protective relays, lamps and illumination. South Campus.

    Pre & Co Requisite(s):  

    Prerequisite: ELEC-1171 or ATEE-2350 or related work experience


    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to differentiate between a WYE and a delta system.

    Objectives:

    1. Lay out a vector diagram of voltages in a three phase WYE circuit.
    2. Plot a vector diagram of voltages in a three-phase delta circuit.
    3. Apply the law of cosines to calculate the line current in a three-phase system.
    4. Calculate the power, the true power, and the total power in three phase systems.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to define the operation of a transformer.

    Objectives:

    1. Define step down transformer, step up transformer, transformer efficiency, exciting current, ampere-turns, and primary winding to secondary winding voltage and current ratios.
    2. Explain feedback from one secondary winding to the other primary winding and state the steps that must be taken to minimize this hazard.
    3. List the information provided on the nameplate of a transformer.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Review - Alternating Currents
    2. Review - Inductive and Capacitive Reactances
    3. Three-Phase voltages, phase sequence, the WYE connection
    4. The Delta Connection
    5. Power Measurement in Three-Phase Systems
    6. Voltmeter, Ammeter, Wattmeter, Varmeter, Power Factor Meter
    7. Syncroscope, Frequency Meters, Recording Instruments, Watt-Hour Meter
    8. Transformer Primary and Secondary Ratios, Losses and Efficiency, Polarity
    9. Multiple Tapped Winding, Transformer Cooling, Transformer Oil, Taps, Frequency, Volts, Impedance, Data
    10. Delta Connection, WYE Connection, Delta-WYE Connection
    11. WYE-Delta Connection, Open-Delta, Three-Phase Transformer
    12. Instrument Transformers, Auto Transformers
    13. Constant Current Transformers, Induction Voltage Regulators

    Primary Faculty
    Dulinski, Kenneth
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Hinrichsen, Timothy



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ELEC 2380 - Electrical - Alternating Current Machines


    Credits: 2.00
    (2 contact hrs)
    (formerly ATEE-2260) ELEC-2380 examines alternators, rotating magnetic fields, A.C. motors, speed control, types of winding, introduction to A.C. motor control. South Campus.

    Pre & Co Requisite(s):  

    Prerequisite: ELEC-2370 or related work experience


    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1:
    Upon completion of the course, students will be able to classify alternators by the type of construction used and their principle of operation.

    Objectives:

    1. Explain the operation of a filed discharge circuit used with the separately excited field in an alternator.
    2. List the method of cooling and ventilation used in large alternators.
    3. Define synchronous impedance and synchronous reactance.

    Outcome 2:
    Upon completion of the course, students will be able to describe the construction of the synchronous motor, listing all of its components and explain the function of each component.

    Objectives:

    1. Describe the steps in the operation of the synchronous motor from the moment it is energized until the motor locks in at the synchronous speed.
    2. Calculate the synchronous speed of the three-phase synchronous motor.
    3. Explain how a synchronous motor may be used to correct the power factor.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Generator Principles, Power Factor, Alternator Impedance
    2. Regulation, Control, Synchronization
    3. Rotating Magnetic Field, Speed, Pole Frequency, Slip
    4. Operating Characteristics, Squirrel Cage, Induction Motor Advantages
    5. Torque Speed, Power Factor, Motor and Power Calculation, Dual Voltage, Code Letter
    6. Name Plate Data, Wound Rotor Motor Torque and Speed, Characteristics
    7. Synchronous Motor Principles, Speed and Power Factor
    8. Across the Line and Reversing Starters, Plugging, Braking
    9. Reduced Voltage Starting, Motor Response, Resistance Method
    10. Autotransformer, Part Winds
    11. Star-Delta, Two Speed, Two Winding
    12. Two Speed, One Winding, Four Speed, Dual Winding
    13. Wound Motor Controllers, Manual and Automatic
    14. Single Phase Motors, Induction & Conduction

    Primary Faculty
    Dulinski, Kenneth
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Hinrichsen, Timothy



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ELEC 2400 - Microprocessor Interfacing


    Credits: 3.00
    (8 contact hrs per week for 8 weeks)
    (formerly EETE-2400) ELEC-2400 covers interfacing the microcomputer in serial and parallel format. Topics include handshake control, PIA, ACIA, UARTS, AD and DA conversions, interfacing the microcomputer to TTYs CRTs Modems, floppy disks, dynamic and static memories, and electrical/mechanical devices. South Campus.

    Pre & Co Requisite(s):  

    Prerequisite: ELEC-2270 or EETE-2270


    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1:
    Upon completion of this course, students will interface a micro controller to various electronic and electromechanical devices.

    Objectives:

    1. Given an ASCII character, the student will draw the timing diagrams for asynchronous serial data in TTL and RS232 formats.
    2. Given the timing diagram for the Centronics parallel interface, the student will show the proper hardware connections and the assembly code needed to send ASCII characters to a printer.
    3. The student will Interface an LCD display, and by writing the proper assembly code, display messages or patterns.

    Outcome 2:
    Upon completion of this course, students will program and apply parallel, serial, A/D and timer circuitry to various interfacing projects.

    Objectives:

    1. Given the timing diagram for the Centronics parallel interface, the student will show the proper hardware connections and the assembly code needed to send ASCII characters to a printer.
    2. The student will write interrupt service routines to accomplish tasks specified by the instructor.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    Topic

    1. Hardware Pg. 203
    2. Basic I/O Ports (Parallel I/O)
    3. 8-5 —- 8-8 Interrupts and Polling
    4. Serial I/O
    5. Timing Systems and Port A
    6. A/D
    7. Microprocessor Control and Memories
    8. Final Project:

    A final project is given in which the student must combine hardware and software to meet the specifications outline by the instructor. The student must design the hardware and generate the software necessary to accomplish the task specified. Some outside research may be necessary. Examples of previous projects include: talking voltmeters, speech recognition, digital oscilloscope, using speech synthesis to provide output for a series of game modules, electronic curve tracing turtle, etc


    Primary Faculty
    Dulinski, Kenneth
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Hinrichsen, Timothy



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ELEC 2410 - Electrical - National Electrical Code


    Credits: 2.00
    (2 contact hrs)
    (formerly ATEE-2410) ELEC-2410 studies national and local electrical codes for wiring and apparatus. It covers wiring design and protection, wiring methods and materials, general use equipment, special occupancies, special equipment, and the use of tables and diagrams for the solution of practical wiring problems. South Campus.

    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1:
    Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to correctly use the N.E.C. book.

    Objectives:

    1. Correctly access the information contained in this syllabus.
    2. Find the correct wire size for a specific installation.
    3. Calculate the size of feeders and wires needed for a specific installation.

    Outcome 2:
    Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to, using the current N.E.C. book, calculate the size of conductors needed to wire a motor.

    Objectives:

    1. Using the N.E.C. table, size the conductor.
    2. Using the N.E.C. table, size the conduit.
    3. Using the N.E.C. table, size the motor starter.

    Outcome 3:
    Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to identify the various hazardous locations and describe the type of conduit and conductors needed at a specific location.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify a Class 1 location.
    2. Identify a Class 2 location.
    3. Identify a Class 3 location.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES
    (Bulleted outcomes apply to the course)

    • 1. The graduate can integrate the knowledge and technological skills necessary to be a successful learner.
    • 2. The graduate can demonstrate how to think competently.
    • 3. The graduate can demonstrate how to employ mathematical knowledge.
    • 4. The graduate can demonstrate how to communicate competently.
    1. The graduate is sensitive to issues relating to a diverse, global society.

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    1. Introduction to NEC/Definitions
    2. Boxes and Enclosures
    3. Cables
    4. Raceways and Conductors
    5. General Provisions (One Family Dwellings)
    6. Specific Provisions
    7. General Provisions (Commercial)
    8. Hazardous Locations
    9. Industrial
    10. Special Occupancies
    11. Specific Equipment

    Primary Faculty
    Dulinski, Kenneth
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Hinrichsen, Timothy



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

 

Page: 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 | 9 | 10